**** 18.0.2.7/19.0.2.7 *** NOT AVAILABLE YET (Except For Interim Versions) ***************
There was an issue where a Location's Purchase Order created at the MAIN showed a total
of "0.00" and was "Closed" after Data-Syncing to the Location.  This has been fixed.
[18.0.2.6a/19.0.2.6a]
******************************************************************************************
"List All Payments..." menu item has been added to the "A/P" memnu in EDC Accounting.
[18.0.2.6c/19.0.2.6c]
******************************************************************************************
In the "Functions" menus found on most record listings, there is a new Function called
"JSON Records Export...".  When selected and run on the selected records in the listing,
a complete export of all record data is exported to disk in JSON format.  This is a 
universale format for data, and contains associated line-items, which other exports do
not.  This format is human readable if opened in a text editor, and can be converted
free of charge to Excel format by this on-line service:

	https://products.aspose.app/cells/convert-json-to-excel
	
[18.0.2.6c/19.0.2.6c]
******************************************************************************************



**** 19.0.2.6 *** 11/01/2023 *************************************************************
4D v19.7 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication for the v19
versions of PIMS.  Your Client apps will update and restart automatically (just once).
This version is compatible for macOS Sonoma.
	** Please read new System Requirements.  [19.0.2.6]
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 18.0.2.5/19.0.2.5 *** 10/27/2023 ****************************************************
When updating an Order Line-Item from the API, it is now possible to set a bypass Tax
amount charged on that Line-Item.
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
"Kit" items are now properly processed by the Order API.
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
The "List Mobile Orders..." function now sorts Orders the same as other Order listings.
"Kit" items are now properly processed by the Order API.
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to print the Order line-item's Serial Numbers with the item
Description.  There is a new PIMS Preferences (Defaults,Option-5) called:
"Print Serial Numbers On Order Line-Items".  In conjunction with this, there is also an
additional option called "Print Serial Numbers On Picking List Line-Items".
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
The "List Mobile Orders..." function now sorts Orders the same as other Order listings.
"Kit" items are now properly processed by the Order API.
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
Manually updating a Purchase Order line-item Status will now populate all associated
Backordered Salesorders ("-A", etc.).
[18.0.2.4a/19.0.2.4a]
******************************************************************************************
All "E-Mail" field lengths have been updated from 80 characters to 255.
[18.0.2.4b/19.0.2.4b]
******************************************************************************************
The creditcard "Tag Line" in some instances truncated the 998 character limit to 255
characters when printed on an Order.  This has been fixed.
[18.0.2.4c/19.0.2.4c]
******************************************************************************************
The "List Mobile Orders..." function did not sort properly when listed.  It also blocked
other windows from being opened simultaneously.  This has been fixed.
[18.0.2.4d/19.0.2.4d]
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 18.0.2.4/19.0.2.4 *** 03/24/2023 ****************************************************
The "INVENTORY HOLDING REPORT" in the Accounting Module how shows the Vendor in the
listing.
[18.0.2.3c/19.0.2.3c]
******************************************************************************************
When manually changing the PRICE on the Inventory record, this is now recorded in that
records "History" field as well as the "Odd Things File".
[18.0.2.3c/19.0.2.3c]
******************************************************************************************
On the User Log-In screen, the AUTHORIZED USERS listing is now initially sorted
[18.0.2.3d/19.0.2.3d]
******************************************************************************************
The Order listing "Selected Invoices To PDF" function has been changed to:
"All Selected Orders To PDF Document...".  This now allows Orders of any type to be 
processed into a single PDF document.
[18.0.2.3d/19.0.2.3d]
******************************************************************************************
The "When Adjusting HELD On Held Items Report, Put Held Back Into ON-HAND" function was
not properly adjusting the ON-HAND figures.  This has been corrected.
[18.0.2.3d/19.0.2.3d]
******************************************************************************************
The e-mail engine (function set) in PIMS has been updated to the latest parameters for
today's e-mailing requirements.  It is far more compatible.
[18.0.2.3i/19.0.2.3i]
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 18.0.2.3/19.0.2.3 *** 12/16/2022 ****************************************************
4D v19.5 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication for the v19
versions of PIMS.  Your Client apps will update and restart automatically (just once).
This version is certified for macOS Ventura.
	** Please read new System Requirements.  [19.0.2.2d]
******************************************************************************************
The function that was used to consolidate Invoices into a single PDF document did not run
on newer macOS versions.  This was due to an Apple limitation.  We have worked out a
solution to this, allowing this function to resume on any macOS that the version of PIMS
runs on.  [18.0.2.2a/19.0.2.2a]
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called: 
"When Adjusting HELD On Held Items Report, Put Held Back Into ON-HAND"
When checked, PIMS will roll the HELD discrepancy from the HELD ITEM REPORT back into the
ON-HAND figure before adjusting it.  [18.0.2.2c/19.0.2.2c]
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function under the Customer listing's FUNCTION menu called:
"Export Selected For E-Mail Service...".  When selected, it will export a text file
suitable for e-mail marketing programs like MailChimp.  [18.0.2.2c/19.0.2.2c]
******************************************************************************************
The "Swap Part Code" button on the Inventory "Components" screen has been rewritten to be
compatible with newer macOS platforms.  [18.0.2.2d/19.0.2.2d]
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.6.4/18.0.2.2/19.0.2.2 *** 10/12/2022 *******************************************
4D v19.4 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication for the v19
versions of PIMS.  4D v18.6 is now being used for PIMS v18.  This is the last 
version of PIMS v17 that will be offered.  It is officially retired at this point.  It
will still be offered support (for qualified Users) , but no further Updates will be
produced.  No further Plug-Ins will be created and/or modified for v17 as well.
******************************************************************************************
Windows 11 is now supported with this version of PIMS v19, however it is strongly 
recommended that you avoid Windows 11 at this point in time.
******************************************************************************************
The two "Product Availability" widgets have been enhanced.  There is an option to display
all searched items, regardless of whether they have activity or not.  The Vendor Code has
been added to the listing.  The screen can now be stretched both vertically and
horizontally.  "Command-S" and "Command-Q" are shortcuts for the search buttons.
******************************************************************************************
In addition to the standard "Search Editor" in PIMS, there is now a "Search By Template"
function for some of the key files in PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
There have been modifications to the e-mail template for e-mailing a Customer from a
Receiving Record detail.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Intuit Payroll import option in Accounting Settings for Intuit Payroll.
******************************************************************************************
Windows PC PIMS v19 series is now available.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "READ-ONLY PO".  Any User associated to this Group
will not be able to save a Purchase Order or add lines to it.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing a Customer from the Receiving Record, PIMS will now use the SHIP-TO
e-mail address first.  If that's not available, then the BILL-TO address is used.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory record, if you click "TOTAL ON ORDER" PIMS will list the Purchase Orders
that make up this number.
******************************************************************************************
If a Customer had a Tax Jurisdiction on their Customer record and they were flagged as 
Tax Exempt (even if the Jurisdiction wasn't), then the Tax Exempt flag was not checked
when the Customer was loaded to an Order.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When modifying the HTML Template used to e-mail Customers from a Receiving Record posting
detail, there is an option "Subject" line that you can manually assign.
******************************************************************************************
If Legacy On-Hand processing is set in PIMS Preferences, the Product Availability widgets
will show the actual On-Hand (zero if negative) and not the calculated "Real" On-Hand.
******************************************************************************************
If Legacy On-Hand processing was set in PIMS Preferences and an Inventory record has a
negative ON-HAND, then when PIMS automatically adjusts the SHIP'D quantity on an Order to
backorder product the negative ON-HAND was placed in the SHIP'D field.  This is fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking the "Export Summary" button on the Product Purchase Worksheet, the "Max Stk"
field was not exported.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new API function to allow for applying multiple Customer credits to an Invoice.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference (Defaults, page# 5) called 
"Isolate Order# On Receiving Customer E-Mails".  Instead of grouping products received on
a Receiving Record by e-mail address, this option will group by Order#.
There are also new HTML TAGs available on the HTML Template designer page to accompany 
this new option.  This includes TAGs for the "Subject" field.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new SHOPSITE PRO PIMS Inventory setting called 
"DON'T UPLOAD INVENTORY KEYWORDS".
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.6.3/18.0.2.1/19.0.2.1 *** 07/23/2022 *******************************************
The USPS "Address Verification" function in PIMS has been updated to the current version.
The complete "City" name is now returned and PIMS no longer uses the appreciated response.
******************************************************************************************
For products not requiring Serial Numbers (not flagged on Inventory record), you could
enter a number of Serial Numbers on the Inventory Transfer line-item that did not equal
the quantity needed.  You could not do this if the product required a Serial Number.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On Posted Checks, Payments, and Deposits, the VOID and TAB controls were greyed-out on
v18 versions of PIMS.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The "@" character is no longer removed from the BATTN and SATTN fields on the Order
entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when using Custom Field Mapping with the ShopSite Pro Inventory upload,
when your PIMS was upgraded from a very old version.  This has been compensated for.
******************************************************************************************
The "Sales Tax Report" has been rewritten internally to handle all sorts of mixed tax
conditions, including making the "Tax Jurisdictions" the top priority.
******************************************************************************************
Swapping-out a "Kit" Part Code on an Order would no longer adhere to the "Don't Print"
flag for that item and would print on the Order when it wasn't supposed to.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Inventory listing Function menu item called "Adjust Price By Margin...".
When run on a selection from the listing, you will be prompted for a desired Margin, and
the various PRICEs on that selection will be set to it.
******************************************************************************************
The "Set "OK For WEB" Flag..." Inventory listing Function, now called "Adjust "OK For 
WEB" Flag...", will now let you set and unset that flag on the selected Inventory records.
******************************************************************************************
In a previous Update, the Check's "Notes" field was no longer enterable on a posted Check.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu item under the Customer listings "Function" menu called
"Export Selected Sales Data...".
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now has an option (checkbox) for signature compatibility with the MX925 CED.
******************************************************************************************
When processing a Customer Payment with a Discount, the Payment Transactions Report
referenced the original amount and not the net amount after the discount.  This has been 
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When serialized items exist on a Salesorder or Invoice and holding is taking place, any
associated Order line-item Serial Number has its "HOLD" flag set or un-set.  This will
keep that Serial Number from being added to another Order prior to the original Invoice
posting.
******************************************************************************************
The "TAB" controls were greyed-out on a posted Receiving Record.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Starting with PIMS v19.x.x.x, PIMS is now compatible with macOS "Dark Mode".
******************************************************************************************
Apple no longer allow PDF consolidation on macOS Monterey.  PIMS will now warn you to 
this affect.
******************************************************************************************
The "PROCESS ORDER" WEB API no longer traps for posted Invoices.  This allows data fields
(Tracking Numbers, etc.) to be updated.
******************************************************************************************
You can now visit a Rental Contract (Incoming) from an Order.  Previously, you could only
visit a Contract from an  "Outgoing" Order.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an API to create/update Inventory records.  Authorization required to use
this function.
******************************************************************************************
The "Narrow List" function on the SEARCH EDITOR LISTING was not working properly.  It's
now fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The following fields have been added to the PROCESSORDER API:
	DATE_SHIPPED	(as text field)
	NOTES_FOR_PICKING_LIST
	PRINTED_COMMENT
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.6.2/18.0.2.0 *** 05/24/2021 ****************************************************
When clicking the Order entry screen's "Cancel" button and receiving a warning to stop
the cancel process, clicking the button again real fast would allow it to cancel anyway.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Various "Apple Dealer" specific changes made.  Please reference that Version History if
applicable.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.6.1/18.0.1.9 *** 05/05/2021 ****************************************************
Printing a selection of Orders will now all go to the selected printer, regardless of
Auto-Choose Printer setting.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.5.9/18.0.1.7 *** 04/17/2021 ****************************************************
It is now possible for PIMS to process creditcard "PRE-AUTHs" when downloading orders from
ShopSite Pro.  Previously, you could not "Capture" PRE-AUTHs downloaded from ShopSite Pro.
Now you can.  To enable this, you need to check the checkbox called "PROCESS SHOPSITE 
CREDITCARD PRE-AUTHS" in ShopSite settings in PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preferences (More/Options-5) called "Automatically Format Phone# 
Fields".  When selected, PIMS will format Phone# fields as such:
	11 numbers = +n (nnn) nnn-nnnn
	10 numbers = (nnn) nnn-nnnn
	7  numbers = nnn-nnnn
All formatting characters are removed first, then the number count is made.  It the count
is neither 11, 10, or 7, then the number is left unchanged.  There is an additional 
function on the Customer record where you can click on the main phone number field titles
to get a listing of over 200 phone# Country Codes.  If selected, this will be appended to
the beginning of the phone#.  This function will not remove any existing Country Code.
******************************************************************************************
The Bank Account number is now mandatory on the Bank record.  For those who saw fit to
leave it blank, there is a new function on the Check Register listing called "Change Bank
Account#..." that allows you to assign a new Bank to selected Checks/Deposits that are
missing one.
******************************************************************************************
A new internal Forms Designer engine is installed.  The User Interface remains unchanged.
******************************************************************************************
When performing a "Process Funds Transfer..." function, you can now enter an optional 
note that will be placed on the associated Check and Deposit.
******************************************************************************************
The "Marketing Type" field on the POS Terminal now acts exactly like the same field on
the Order Entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
When viewing Purchase Orders associated with an Order ("List Associated P.O.s..."), the
Order would cancel and go away after clicking "Done" on the Purchase Order listing.  This
no longer happens.
******************************************************************************************
When running the "Summarized Inventory Value Report..." function and drilling down on the 
listing, PIMS would open the subsequent window behind the report window.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When creating an SRO via the PIMS API, the MAIN Location failed to append a "W" to the
end of the SRO#.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The USPS Address Look-up has been updated to conform to the new June 24th 2021 
specifications.
******************************************************************************************
When clearing the START DATE on a Periodic Maintenance record, the END START remained
unchanged.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
You can now "drill-down" on the Sales Tax Report to see the detail that makes up the 
individual amounts.
******************************************************************************************
When copying serial numbers from an Order line-item (by clicking button), PIMS would
append a carriage-return on the end.  This has been removed.
******************************************************************************************
When attaching consolidated Invoices to an e-mailed Customer Statement, PIMS disregarded
any bypass Invoice template for that Customer.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The sort "triangles" have been removed from the Purchase Order listing.  Please use the
"Selection Options:" pop-menu at the bottom of the listing to sort the listing.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a text button on the Order entry screen below the SHIP-TO address block
called "Add As Additional Customer Location".  If clicked, it will add the SHIP-TO
address block to the associated Customer record as an "Additional Location".  There are
warnings to keep you from entering a duplicate...
******************************************************************************************
The "Import Payroll" function has been modified to import Intuit On-Line Payroll.
However, keep in mind that the "payroll export file.iif" file from Intuit is nearly
worthless in the information that it exports.  CheckMark is still supported as well.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS would remove the "@" sign from e-mailed Orders.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference (Defaults/More/Option-5) called:
"Don't Override Non-Taxable Line-Item On Order Type Change".  If checked, PIMS will skip
the default state of the non-taxable Order line-item checkbox when changing and Order to
an Invoice.  This will preserve that setting if manually changed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference (Defaults/More/Option-5) called:
"Process Taxable By State Overrides".  This function will look to the Inventory record
associated with an Order line-item and check a new Inventory field to see if this product
is being sold to a U.S. State in that field. If so, and the Inventory record is flagged
as "Non-Taxable", tax will be charged for that item overriding the non-taxable flag.
This field can be found on the "Tax Overrides" TAB of the Inventory entry screen.  The
field is a large text field titled "Taxable In These U.S. States".  In this field you
would enter U.S. 2 character State codes separated by commas.  PIMS will check this field
to see if tax should be charged, even if the product is being sold out-of-state.
An additional function to allow you to globally apply these State codes to a group of
Inventory records at the same time has been added.  It's called "Assign Taxable States",
and is found under the Inventory listing's "Function menu.  You can enter as many State
codes as you like, separated by commas.  This will be added to, and not replace, what is
already on the selected Inventory records.  If you enter nothing to be applied, the
process will delete all State codes from the selected Inventory records.  This function 
should be considered "BETA" at this point.  Use with caution.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.8/18.0.1.5 *** 12/19/2020 ****************************************************
There's a new field in EDC Accounting Settings called "Bypass DAOH Account".  You can
optionally put a Chart-Of-Account in this field that is to be used to offset a
"Don't Adjust On-Hands" (what DAOH stands for) Inventory item on Receiving Records and
Invoices.  Basically, it becomes the offset for the "Inventory Holding" account instead of
the "Inventory" account.  This allows you to "Hold" non-Inventory items such as Billing
Codes, Product Licenses, etc.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where "Kits" were not printing correctly when e-mailing Orders as PDFs
from an Order listing.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.7c/18.0.1.1 *** 12/12/2020 ***************************************************
There was an issue in any macOS 10.15 or greater where there was an issue with removing
duplicate Serial Numbers from a list (like Receiving).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the PIMS PHP engine that malfunctioned in PIMS v17.x.x.x on newer
macOS (Catalina, Big Sur) that interfered with specific functions like MS Excel file
processing, etc.  This has been corrected.  PIMS v18.x.x.x was not affected.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.7/18.0.1.0 *** 12/04/2020 ****************************************************
v18.x.x.x. of PIMS is a congruent version of PIMS that is compatible with macOS Big Sur.
It uses a different 4D engine.  However, both v17 and v18 of PIMS are simultaneously 
being updated and maintained.  No harm, no foul.  If you want to use PIMS v18.x.x.x., you
need to upgrade your 4D server.  This is still PIMS-Platinum, so no upgrade to PIMS is
necessary or charged.  This is not really necessary at this time to continue to use PIMS,
but is at least offered as an option...
******************************************************************************************
4D v17.4HF2 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
Several Client/Server bugs have been addressed, as well as increased stability.
Existing PIMS-Platinum Client app will automatically update themselves the first time you
connect to this version.  If you have any issues with this automatic Client update, visit
our WEB site ("Downloads") to manually download and replace your PIMS-Platinum Client
folder.  Please note that windows PC Users should backup the "PIMS-Plug-Ins" and
"PIMS Terminal Preferences" folders on each Client terminal.  These can then be restored
once the Clients have updated themselves.  Please also note that cross-platoform PIMS
environments  will not update PIMS Clients that aren't the same platform as the server.
This is because of Apple macOS notarization rules (from Apple).
NOTE:  This version will run just fine on macOS Big Sur, except for a few minor User
Interface anomalies and a "crash" that displays after quitting PIMS.  This crash happens
after the PIMS application has already quit, so no harm is done.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new substantially faster Installer set for the Windows PC versions of PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when displaying an Order, viewing an associated Purchase Order from it,
and then Receiving against that Purchase Order.  An error would be generated, and the 
posting process would be interrupted.  This would make it look like you received more
than you actually did.  This was a rare occasion, and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the "P.O." menu called "Find By Associated Order Number...".
When selected, the standard Order Chooser is displayed where you can find and Order and
display any associated Purchase Orders for processing.
******************************************************************************************
Holding down the "Option" or "Alt" key when first booting a Demo or Single-User version
of PIMS will now display the necessary window to select a different Datafile and/or a
PIMS backup package.  This function was broken by a past 4D Update.
******************************************************************************************
When returning an Order line-item from the ProcessOrder API, that quote character (") was
not being escaped properly.  Quotes are now replaced with two " ' " characters.
******************************************************************************************
The "Apply Customer Credit" window on the Order has been widened to make the REFERENCE
field longer.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where an Order was not previewing either the PDF or HTML document
being e-mailed.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new preference in PIMS Preferences ("More", page "Options-3") called
"Skip Printing Order/SRO Deposit Receipts".  When checked, this will prevent the printing
of Deposit Receipts for both Invoices and SROs.  This is intended for Users that display
deposit information on either the Invoice and/or SRO and therefor don't need an additional
receipt printed for the Customer.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Purchase Order entry screen's "Functions" menu called
"Export Items Text File...".  When selected, the following line-items fields are exported
in a comma-delimited text file:

	PART CODE
	MODEL NUMBER
	DISTRIBUTOR NUMBER
	QUANTITY
	PRODUCT NAME
	BOOK COST
	
You will be prompted to export a "Header" or not.  For those who need a different export,
a plug-in tie is available for a custom export.
******************************************************************************************
The "Export Daily G\J Activity..." menu function will now let you isolate a specific
Chart-Of-Account as an option for the report.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Accounting A/P menu function called "List Vendors We Owe By Week...".
When run, it acts just like the "List Vendors We Owe..." except that it shows amounts
due over a four week period starting with the week you're in.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.6a *** 09/19/2020 ************************************************************
When downloading an Order from ShopSite and using "Payflow Pro" as the ShopSite creditcard
processor, the transaction information imported into PIMS no longer could be parsed.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using the "TaxJar" system in PIMS and downloading Orders from ShopSite, there was an
issue when turning the PIMS Order into an Invoice.  The newly calculated tax was placed in
the second Payment Type field, as the original Payment Type field was locked with the 
ShopSite creditcard approval code.  This has been fixed by leaving the creditcard approval
code blank on those types of Orders until the Order is saved in PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new EDC Accounting Setting called:
"Allow Order And SRO Deposits Greater Than $99,999.00".  When checked, the User can now
process Customer Deposits greater than $99,999.00.  Previously, this was only possible via
an installed Plug-In.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.6 *** 09/11/2020 *************************************************************
The Inventory and Cost-Of-Goods accounts are no longer affected on the original Invoice
when the TSO (Total Shipped Only) checkbox is un-checked. [if no products are being 
delivered]  They are handled on the subsequent Backordered Salesorders when shipped.  
******************************************************************************************
The "Associated Auto-Loads" shown on an Order and SRO when entering a specific Product
now displays the "Stock Price" on that listing.  By "Stock", we mean that no discounting
or any other Price adjustment hs been applied when displaying that Auto-Load.  Of course,
the Price is adjusted if necessary if loaded to the Order/SRO.
******************************************************************************************
The PIMS standard "Order Chooser" now displays the Order Grand Total as well.
******************************************************************************************
The History area on the main, SRO, and Accounting Splash-Screens now show "Names"
associated with the various numbers displayed.
******************************************************************************************
When taking an SRO Deposit, and the amount returned from a Cayan creditcard is less than
what it should be, a new double-set of alerts are presented.  The transaction that's short
will then be "Voided".  If the voiding process fails, then a new alert is displayed.
******************************************************************************************
It is no longer possible to accidentally Post any date to accounting that is older than
the oldest Closed Period.
******************************************************************************************
The "Refund To A/R" button has been removed from the "Deposit" prompt screen.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the P.O. menu (Find Purchase Orders) called
"List Open P.O.s With Unreceived Allocations...".  This will list all open Purchase Orders
for a given date range that are not CLOSED, are PROCESSED, and have un-received products
allocated to Customers.  Stock orders don't count.
******************************************************************************************
On the Freight record entry screen, there is now an "eCOMMERCE SHIPPER CODE" field.
If this is present and orders are being downloaded from ShopSite Pro, PIMS will look for
the ShopSite Shipper Code on the downloaded order and use it to load the appropriate PIMS
"Shipper" to the PIMS Order.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS API function to return Customer data from a given Serial Number.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.5 *** 07/30/2020 *************************************************************
There is a new Cayan device (CED) timeout override setting called:
"Set CED Timeout From 240 To 60 Seconds".  The normal amount of time PIMS is mandated to
wait for a responce from the CED is four minutes (240 seconds).  This is a bit rough for
the handheld CED device, which can be asleep and must be woken up.  Checking this
checkbox will reduce the wait time from 240 to 20 seconds.
******************************************************************************************
The "ProcessOrder" API can now handle all three Payment Types, and not just one.
******************************************************************************************
The "Checked In By" name is now added to the Order History of the Invoice created from
the Rental Agreement "In-Coming" Invoice" function.
******************************************************************************************
When refunding an item on an Order using "Manipulate Line-Items", the User is now prompted
for the reason for the refund.
******************************************************************************************
On a Worksheet, the "Billing Template" fields were not moving when the Order screen was
expanded downward.  This is now fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating an Inventory record, the "Item History" is now cleared on the duplicate
record.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with sending PDF versions of an Order to Gmail users, where the "Note"
attached to the e-mail was not processing line-feeds (returns).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating an Order record, the "QUOTE_VALID_UPTO_DATE" is now cleared.
******************************************************************************************
The "ProcessOrder" WEB API now handles "Gift Card" sale and creation.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Terminal Specific" default printer for the SRO equipment Tag called
"TERMINAL SPECIFIC BYPASS PRINTER FOR TAG" in SRO Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
On occasion, an error was generated when displaying the large "get" text box.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "ProcessOrder" API now allows you to switch Customers (via Customer Code) and remove
a Customer from an Order during an "UPDATE" call.  To remove a Customer, send a "-"
(minus) as a CUSTOMER_CODE.
******************************************************************************************
You can now modify the "CUSTOMER CONTACTS - CONTACT METHODS" in PIMS Preferences.  This
can be found in the "More" section (Options-4) of PIMS Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
By default, no Users belong to the "OVERRIDE_NET_PRICE" Password Group.  Previously,
TOTAL_ACCESS and Administrator did.  If you need this, go ahead and reassign it.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the SRO's "Function" menu called
"View Last CED Transaction...".  This will display the last Cayan creditcard transaction 
details.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.4 *** 04/28/2020 *************************************************************
There is a new function under the Check Register's "Function" menu called
"Detailed Transaction Export...".  Simply select records from a Check, Deposit, or
Check Register listing to export detailed information and account distribution.
******************************************************************************************
The "Billing Statement" template was not printing the labels for the four aged "Periods".
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using the "FetchJSONrecord" API, large text fields are now escaped for carriage
returns, line-feeds, quotes, etc..  The same is true when adding Order line items via an
API.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS is now compatible with the Cayan "Handheld" device.
******************************************************************************************
Adjustments have been made to the Cayan signature capture that frames the signature 
better.
******************************************************************************************
"Auto-Choose" Receipt Printer when printing to a STAR receipt printer now works, and no
longer crashes.  This is Mac only at this point.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function under the "Records" menu on the Order entry screen called:
"Update Existing Customer From Order...".  This is right below the "Add Customer...".
The purpose of this function is to allow you to update Customer address and contact
information by replacing it with whatever is currently on the Order entry screen.  This
includes the complete BILL-TO and SHIP-TO address information as well as Phone, Fax, and 
E-mail Information.  Other Customer data is not touched.  A similar function can be 
found on the SRO entry screen called "Update Customer From SRO...".
******************************************************************************************
There is now the same "Customer Eraser" icon function on the PPOS Terminal as there is
for the Order entry screen.  This is used to clear the Customer data loaded to the
POS screen.
******************************************************************************************
A "Financed By" option has been added to Recurring Expenses.  This data will be copied
over to the associated Purchase Journal when "Post Auto-Payables" is run.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.3 *** 03/14/2020 *************************************************************
The MOBILE POS/SRO APIs have had extensive work performed with the addition of a new type
of LogIn/LogOut function and connected WEB User management.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the word "DETAILS" on a Customer Contact record will allow your to save,
e-mail, copy to clipboard, etc. that record.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an option to change the Starting and Ending times for the Data-Sync "Hold"
period.  This is especially important for Data-Syncing between different time zones.
******************************************************************************************
There are some new default fields for "Forms Designer Preferences..." (Page 1).  There
are now four generic text fields, where you can enter static text to display on any
Forms Designer template.  This is handy for bodies on text that you need to change
frequently, and don't want to modify several templates.  Just place any of these fields
on a template, and you only need change the text in Preferences to have that change
reflected on your templates.
******************************************************************************************
You can now right-click on the "down arrow" on an Inventory Transfer to line-item to
either transfer that item to another Location or to migrate this product to a different
product altogether (ie: open-box/refurbished to regular Inventory, etc.).
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.2 *** 03/05/2020 *************************************************************
When exporting Components from a selection of Inventory records (Inventory Listing),
the sort order of the Components matches that of the Inventory entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
There is a combination of settings that now allows non-taxable products to be charged tax
at specific PIMS Locations only.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.1 *** 02/24/2020 *************************************************************
There was a mismatch between two Accounts Receivable reports.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS-Platinum now (optionally) utilizes the TaxJar company for nation-wide real-time tax 
rate look-ups.  The tax rate for any SHIP-TO address can be looked up automatically on 
the Order entry screen.  It even determines if SHIPPING should be taxed.  
Additional fees apply.  See a video at "https://www.executron.com/videos.html" (YouTube).
There is also a TaxJar compatible CVS sales tax export for uploading to TaxJar.  This is
found in EDC Accounting, Reports, Choose Other Reports, Tax, "TaxJar Sales Tax Export".
******************************************************************************************
When loading an SRO over to an Order, the "ITEM(S) SERVICED:" line has had it's carriage
return removed after the "ITEM(S) SERVICED:".  This displays it as a single line, which
makes more of it visible when a Serial# is present.
******************************************************************************************
On the Vendor and P.O. "Quick Find" functions, the listing is now sorted with the newest
at the top before displaying the first 1000 records listed.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO's Equipment line, the History of a serial# will only be searched when the User
modifies the Serial Number field, and not just when entering/leaving that field.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO entry screen now has the same e-mail validation as the Order and Customer entry
screens.
******************************************************************************************
The large text information fields on the SRO entry screen could not be properly pasted
into.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The internal print engine has been updated.  (hm 6.1 4)
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory record's "LEAD TIME" field is once again calculated automatically by 
subtracting the Purchase Order Date from the current Receiving Record posting date.
This is not an "average", but the number of days required to receive the product from
the last time it was received.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when returning a list of PIMS Users from a WEB API call.  This has
been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The standard SRO (non Apple SRO) Time Worked START TIME and END TIME listing fields are
now enterable (no need to click Finish button).
******************************************************************************************
The Meter Readings listing on the Periodic Maintenance entry screen can now be modified
by double-clicking the various fields.
******************************************************************************************
When PIMS prompts you for text from the large text entry prompt window, it no longer
weeds-out the "@" character.  Previously, it would have been deleted.
******************************************************************************************
The "PIMS FTP" function in "PIMS Tools" has been renamed "PIMS Downloads".  When you
double-click on a file to download, PIMS now directs that request to your system's default
browser (for Catalina compatibility).
******************************************************************************************
When using the Create Order API, the Order Number was not including the Location Code.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using the "Load Customer Tax Jurisdiction On Drop-Ship" preference, and un-checking
the "DROP-SHIP TO CUSTOMER" on the Order entry screen, PIMS would also uncheck that 
Customer's "Tax Exempt" flag.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When Bulk E-Mailing Orders as "PDFs", PIMS would not add the optional "NOTE" to the
Order's e-mails.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using the "Reply-To" e-mail option, PIMS now uses the "SMTP USER ID" as the "FROM",
and the selected "FROM" as the "REPLY-TO".  Previously, PIMS was using the User selected
"FROM" as the SMTP FROM and not the USER ID.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.5.0 *** 12/13/2019 *************************************************************
The PIMS-Platinum suite of Mac products is now macOS Catalina compatible.  "Dark Mode" is
currently not supported, but on macOS it's not something you should be using anyway...
******************************************************************************************
4D v17.3HF2 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
Several Client/Server bugs have been addressed, as well as increased stability.
Existing PIMS-Platinum Client app will automatically update themselves the first time you
connect to this version.  If you have any issues with this automatic Client update, visit
our WEB site ("Downloads") to manually download and replace your PIMS-Platinum Client
folder.
******************************************************************************************
Checking For Updates now displays the ExecUtron Twitter account.  Information about
PIMS Updates can be found there.
******************************************************************************************
Snapping a photo at log-in and Order creating has been removed from PIMS.  This is for
Apple notarization compliance.
******************************************************************************************
When receiving product with serial numbers, transferring these products to another
Location, and then when reconciling the original Purchase Order and changing a product
Book Cost, PIMS would cause the transferred serial numbers to go back to the original
Location.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory Transfer, the "Quick Transfer" was initially letting you transfer 1
without having any stock on-hand.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the printer name for the "OPTIONAL PRINTER FOR CHECKS" will now clear that
printer from that record.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in WEB Services ShopSite settings called "UPDATE ASSOCIATED
CUSTOMER ADDRESS".  If checked, the Customer associated with the downloaded ShopSite order
will have it's Bill-To and Ship-To addresses on it's record updated to match.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.4.2 *** 11/21/2019 *************************************************************
The "ProcessOrder" API (NEWLINEITEM and UPDATELINEITEM) now return all of the fields
below the Order Subtotal (TOTAL TAX, SHIPPING, OTHER, etc.).
******************************************************************************************
There's a new "Print Specific Barcode" button on the SERIAL NUMBER "ORDER BYPASS SCREEN".
When clicked, it will prompt for a Barcode template to print out.  The Barcode template
itself has new "SERIAL NUMBER BYPASS" fields available for this.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory "Keyword" Search function has been optimized for better results.
******************************************************************************************
For those who are affected by the new tax regulations concerning out-of-state taxation,
we've made a change to PIMS.  There is a new field on the Customer record called
"CHARGE OUT-OF-STATE TAX".  You would check this on any Customer record that has a
physical presence in your state, even though they are an out-of-state Customer.  Some
states require you charge tax, even if you ship the product out-of-state.  This will
handle that.  When the Customer is loaded to an Order, the same flag on the Order entry
screen ("CHARGE OUT-OF-STATE TAX OVERRIDE") is set to match.  This flag determines if
tax should be charged for this specific OOS Customer.  This Order checkbox is User
modifiable.  For this to work, a Tax Jurisdiction (County) needs to be present on
the Order.  You should really have default Tax Jurisdictions loaded to the Customer,
record for both the main address and all Additional Locations listed on their record.
******************************************************************************************
When Printing A/R Statements, if you were not applying applicable Finance Charges, 
Customer A/R Ledgers were not necessarily "Aged".  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When printing a Statement from the Customer record and telling PIMS to include associated
Invoices, PIMS did not hide the "Kit" items if asked to.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There might be an occasion where a Customer record could be bumped out of memory during
an Accounts Receivable transaction, if that Customer record was in a list being looped
through.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using either the "ProcessOrder" or "ProcessSRO" APIs in PIMS, you can now send a
"PIMS_USER" field that will stamp these records with the User that used the API.
******************************************************************************************
When manually importing Purchase Order line-items, PIMS would display each error at a time
when encountered.  PIMS now gathers these errors and displays them at the end instead.
******************************************************************************************
The internal Forms Designer engine has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
During a Data-Sync session, if an Order is envolved in a "fulfillment" scenario 
(on either end), it's skipped on both ends.
******************************************************************************************
Negative balances (credits) are no longer exported in the Customer A/R Aging Report.
******************************************************************************************
Some Users were having issues with Users disappearing.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There were rare occasions when Cayan would return an error message as an Approval Code.
PIMS now traps for this.
******************************************************************************************
The Custom Inventory Fields will now only display if the individual fields are set up in
PIMS Preferences.  Before this update, all fields would show regardless of whether they 
were configured or not.
******************************************************************************************
Manually changing the status of the "PAID" button on the Order entry screen is now flagged
in the "Odd Things" file.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.4.0 *** 09/13/2019 *************************************************************
4D v17.2HF1 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
Several Client/Server bugs have been addressed, as well as increased stability.
Existing PIMS-Platinum Client app will automatically update themselves the first time you
connect to this version.  If you have any issues with this automatic Client update, visit
our WEB site ("Downloads") to manually download and replace your PIMS-Platinum Client
folder.
PLEASE NOTE: The minimum System Requirement for the Mac version is "macOS Sierra 10.12.6".
******************************************************************************************
The Cayan "Terminal ID" field (unmarked) on the "Terminal Specific Preferences"
standalone entry screen was not enterable for manual change.  It was on the main PIMS
Preferences screen, but not that one.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When using the "ProcessOrder" API to add a line-item to an Order, the "Line Reference#"
was not returned (blank).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Vendor record, the Purchase Order listing now sorts by the newest at the top.
******************************************************************************************
The "PART_NUMBER" is now returned with the "ProcessOrder" API when adding/updating an
Order line-item.  This aids with repetitive calls.
******************************************************************************************
On the Vendor records (PURCHASE ORDERS), the Purchase Orders now sort by PO_DATE and not
CREATE_DATE.
******************************************************************************************
If you wish to make it so that a User can only view a Serial Number record but not save
changes, assign them to the new "CAN_NOT_MODIFY_SERIAL_NOs" Password Group.  This will
hide the "SAVE" button on the Serial Number screen.
******************************************************************************************
When a Search Editor template was used as a "Screen Button", and that template was then
deleted from the system, and second internal system error was displayed.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
"Repaired-By" ("R.B.") code has been added to the SRO listing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS Preferences called "Use "Old School" Employee Code Entry On
Order".  If checked, the Salesperson code on the Order entry screens can be entered 
by typing a character or more and pressing TAB.  You can then choose from a listing, or if
just one is found it will load automatically.  With this option not checked, the entire
Employee Code must be entered to load.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now has the ability to isolate specific Location "ON-HAND" quantities available to
calculate the total "Quantity Available" when uploading to ShopSite Pro.  Refer to
ShopSite/PIMS document in our on-line "Tech Notes" area for more info.
******************************************************************************************
The search tool on the upper left of the Customer listing now performs like the "Name"
field on the standard Customer Chooser.  The search only affects the current listing.
Deleting characters in the search string restores the original list.  The same is also
now true for Vendor and Inventory listings.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option for the PIMS Preferences "Default E-Mail" called
"Activate Office365/GMail 'Reply To' Process".  If checked, PIMS will add a "REPLY-TO" to
all outgoing e-mails using the bypass "FROM" selected as the "REPLY-TO" and the system
"FROM" as the actual e-mail "FROM" field.  As long as your SMTP USER ID and SMTP "FROM"
ADDRESS are the same, you should be able to better send e-mails through GMail and
Office365.  The "REPLY-TO" for instance would be the User when sending off e-mail Quotes
and the FROM would be hard-coded to the main system FROM.
******************************************************************************************
On occasion, Cayan has been sending back error codes in the "Approval Code" field during
refunds that exceed the sales cap.  This is now being compensated for so that PIMS does
not receive a false-positive.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new "Additional Defaults" option in EDC Accounting "Accounting Preferences..."
called "Use Legacy Payment Check Header".  If checked, PIMS will process the Payment
Check "Header" text the same way it did in PIMS-Gold.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the EDC Accounting Module called "Export Daily G\J Activity".
This is under the "G/L" menu and allows you to select a date range of posted General
Journal entries to export.  Enough data is exported to allow you to reconstruct all
accounting that took place during that period.  This information is complete enough to
import into other accounting/reporting systems.  The User must belong to the 
"EXPORT INFORMATION" Password Group to use this function.
******************************************************************************************
The "TOTAL_ACCESS" Password Group now belongs to the "VIEW_LOCKED_CUSTOMER" Password Group
by default.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new field on the Purchase Order "Vendor Reconciliation" page called "OTHER".
Just like "FREIGHT ON INVOICE" and "TAX ON INVOICE", this "OTHER" field can accept a
dollor amount to put towards the Vendor's Invoice total for reconciliations purposes.
The amount in this field will not be considered in the calculation unless a 
chart-of-account is chosen for it.  This can be done by clicking the text button called 
"Account?".  When clicked, the standard Account Chooser is displayed.  If an account is
selected, then this dollar amount will be used.  In order to select an Account, the User
must belong to the "ASSIGN_PO_OTHER_ACCT" Password Group.  Holding down the SHIFT key
when clicking the "Account?" button will clear the COA for this amount.  This field is
helpful for such things as Tarifs, Recycling Charges, etc.
******************************************************************************************
The PIMS Server now knows when a Client computer is sleeping, if the Client computer is 
properly working.  The server will attempt to reconnect to the computer once it wakes 
back up.
******************************************************************************************
There is an option in EDC Accounting/Accounting Preferences called
"E-Mail Paperless Customer When Printing Invoice".  If checked, on an Invoice containing
an A/R Payment Type, if printed the User will be prompted to e-mail the Invoice as well.
This is to insure that the person cutting checks gets a copy of this Invoice, and it's
not lost after the Customer leaves the premises.
******************************************************************************************
The Rental Module's splash-screen now sports assignable screen buttons, like other PIMS
splash-screens.
******************************************************************************************
On the Rental Agreement entry screen, the "CHECKED-IN BY" field is now mandatory before
clicking the "In-Coming Invoice" button.
******************************************************************************************
When exporting an A/R Aging Report, lines with no balance due were exported as well.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
In the "ProcessOrder" API, PIMS now accepts all three Payment Types in the "Finalize"
call and not just one.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.2.6 - 17.1.3.99 ****************************************************************
These interim releases were part of a private Apple Pilot program, and were not released
to the public...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.2.5 *** 06/21/2019 *************************************************************
During Data-Sync, Location SROs created at the MAIN Location now have the option of being
sent to that specific Location.  However, they must not already exist at that Location.
This is a "one time shot" to get that SRO to the Location from the MAIN.  This is mainly
to facilitate SROs created from the "WEB" at the MAIN for other Locations, though they
can be created manually as well.
******************************************************************************************
When adding an item to the "ProcessOrder" API, the "LINE_REF_LOCK_CODE" code is returned
after the "ORDER_GRAND_TOTAL" field.
******************************************************************************************
When "Prepping" a datafile for use by a new Location, the SROs not belonging to that 
Location are now removed as well.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in PIMS Preferences called 
"Default Order Shipped Date To Packing List Print Date".  If checked, the Order's DATE
SHIPPED field will be set to the current date when the Packing List is printed.  This
will only happen if the DATE SHIPPED is blank.
******************************************************************************************
The "Department" records now have optional overriding Cost-Of-Sales accounts for each
Location you have.  This allows you to pull Location/Department specific P&Ls in EDC
Accounting.
******************************************************************************************
In some circumstances, the Search Editor could not accept the "Paste" command.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When manually resending an SRO "Status" e-mail, there was no indication that it actually
sent properly.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.2.4 *** 06/07/2019 *************************************************************
ENHANCEMENT: On the Order line-item entry screen, you can now add, swap, and remove bundle
line-items.  This is only available if the item is not a "CTO" item.
******************************************************************************************
ENHANCEMENT: When using the PIMS "Fetch Record" API, the records are now sorted before
returning an optional maximum number of records.
******************************************************************************************
ENHANCEMENT: Data-Sync has been updated to a 2048-bit secure architecture (as an option).
******************************************************************************************
ENHANCEMENT: The Forms Designer Module has been updated internally to newer code.
******************************************************************************************
ENHANCEMENT: The performance of the "Prep Datafile Copy For New Location..." function has
been greatly increased.
******************************************************************************************
BUG FIX: When e-mailing Orders as PDF documents, "Kits" were not displayed correctly on
the PDF document.  The same was true for saving as PDF.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
BUG FIX: "Kit" products were not processed correctly on Invoices created from Billing
Templates. This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
RETIRED: E-Mailing Orders in "HTML" format is no longer supported, but exists for now for
backwards compatibility.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.2.3 *** 06/01/2019 *************************************************************
** From this point on, Apple specific (Ingram, GSX, etc.) enhancements, fixes, etc. will
be featured in their own "Version History" document...
******************************************************************************************
You can now change the type of Forms Designer template by clicking on the name of the
"TYPE OF TEMPLATE" being displayed.  This is helpful when duplicating an Invoice for the
purpose of creating Salesorders and Quotes.
******************************************************************************************
The "POS Terminal" now has the same "VOID" button as the full Order Entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
There is now the same "plug-in button" on the POS Terminal screen that exists on the full
Order Entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
The "Object Library" (Scrapbook) on the Forms Designer template entry screen now has an
"I/O" button for exporting and importing saved Template objects.  This allows you to share
objects from one PIMS system to another (this version or greater).
******************************************************************************************
Barcode fonts of any kind are no longer needed for any Forms Designer template.  Barcodes
(up to 200 different types) can now be auto-generated where needed.
******************************************************************************************
If you created more than one Inventory record at a time, with those windows open, it was
possible to get around the error-trapping and save these records all with the same Part
Code.  Clever as it was, this has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
If you created more than one Customer record at a time, with those windows open, it was
possible to get around the error-trapping and save these records all with the same Part
Code.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When running a Cayan transaction from an Order, if either a "Decline" or "Error" is
returned, PIMS will double-check to see if the transaction might have actually gone
through.  At that point if it did, PIMS will set the Order as though it went through the
first time.  This is documented in the "Order History".
******************************************************************************************
If PIMS is in the background, and a PIMS alert is being displayed, a call to the standard
O/S (Mac and Windows) messaging system is made alerting you that PIMS is displaying a
message in the background.
******************************************************************************************
When running "Post Auto-Payables", the Recurring Expense "DESCRIPTION Title" is added to
the Purchase Journal record's "Description" field (prefixed with "Auto-POST:").  This is
carried over to the Check header when printing the associated Payment Check.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.2.0 *** 05/17/2019 *************************************************************
There is a new Terminal Specific PIMS Preference called "Switch To Background Alerts".
When checked, most PIMS alerts, warnings, and minor messages will be displayed in The
background in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.  You can continue working while
these types of alerts are displayed.  They will close automatically in 15 seconds.  You
can also close them manually by clicking the "X".  If you wish to keep on open in a
bigger window, just double-click the text being displayed.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to print special "2-Dimensional" barcodes on Orders.  This includes the
Shipping Barcode "PDF417", "QR" Barcode, and any number of custom 1D/2D Barcodes.
******************************************************************************************
You can now open multiple Forms Designer templates at once, and copy/paste between them. 
******************************************************************************************
"Restore Inventory Listing State" BETA
******************************************************************************************
Sometimes a Customer record could sneak into an SRO Deposit function from another terminal
and keep most of that Deposit from going through (record lock).  That was good.  However,
sometimes a credit card transaction for that Deposit went through anyway.  This should be
fixed now.
******************************************************************************************
For those using GSX, the "Summer/2019" initial update process has started...
******************************************************************************************
Changes were made to how Location "Isolated" Inventory is displayed on Inventory Choosers.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called "Load Customer Tax Jurisdiction On Drop-Ship Only".
If checked, PIMS will not load the default Tax Jurisdiction found on the Customer record
(if present) unless the "DROP-SHIP TO CUSTOMER" flag is set on the Order.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.9 *** 05/13/2019 *************************************************************
The "Idle Log-In" prompt was causing a problem with the main menu bar where double "Edit"
and "File" menus would display.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The Apple GDV report was exporting numeric fields that were zero as blank.  They now have
"0" exported and not blank.
******************************************************************************************
Work has been performed on the default "FROM" choices when e-mailing an Order or SRO
Estimate in PIMS.  This includes the ability to flag the "Bypass" FROM on a specific
terminal as the default, overriding all others.
******************************************************************************************
When writing a Check from the Bank Reconciliation entry screen, the Check's TAB-Bar
replaced the TAB-Bar on the Reconciliation screen.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When a GSX Labor Reconciliation encounters a duplicate SRO# with the same Invoice TOTAL
amount, it's skipped.  However, it logged an error anyway.  This is not really an error,
as the entire Invoice was handled on the first go-around.  This process has been modified
to go ahead and skip the second occurrence of the Invoice, but not log it as an error.
This will cut the size of the process log considerably.
******************************************************************************************
Under certain circumstances, an unbalanced Inventory Transfer could be posted.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Further work has been performed on the Ingram/Micro-D PIMS link.
******************************************************************************************
Enhancements have been made to increase the contrast of the User's listing on the standard
PIMS log-in prompt.
******************************************************************************************
When loading an item to an Order that has "Associated Auto-Loads" and not enough in stock
to fill the Order, with automatic backordering set, the initial item was not processed
for backordering.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
"SHOW COMPONENT STATS" on the Workorder now takes into affect the "Real Inventory"
calculation unless otherwise overridden in PIMS Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.8 *** 05/01/2019 *************************************************************
BETA release only...
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.7 *** 04/26/2019 *************************************************************
This version of PIMS now looks to a different FTP server to display available PIMS files
in PIMS Tools (FTP Client).
******************************************************************************************
Changes in the way the SRO Part's "Return Type" is displayed (introduced in v17.1.1.6)
have been made.  The Part# must start with "661-" and have been previously uploaded to
GSX, otherwise it is invisible.  If this criteria has been met and the Return Type has
already been chosen, then the name of the Return Type is displayed instead.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox in PIMS Preferences (Defaults "More") called :"Display Legacy 
ON-HAND Figures".  If checked, PIMS will display the actual ON-HAND field quantity instead
of the more accurate calculated figure.  This is generally used by Manufacturers.  This
used to be accomplished with a plug-in, so be suree and remove that old plug-in if you use
this new built-in function.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO entry screen, the "EQUIPMENT PASSWORD" field is now easier to read.
******************************************************************************************
Menu items that were grey'd out on the Order entry screen have been lighted back up.
******************************************************************************************
When modifying the periodic uploading and downloading of records settings in ShopSite
settings (PIMS), it is no longer necessary to reboot the server to have these changes
take affect.
******************************************************************************************
The RMA "Part Code" field length has been increased from 30 characters to 40 characters to
match the Inventory record.
******************************************************************************************
For qualified Apple Resellers, the Inventory Listing now has a "GSX" menu containing the
new GDV ("Monday Morning") reports.  One for Inventory and one for Sales.  There is also
a new menu function under the main "Inventory" menu (List Inventory) called
"List All GDV Items...".
******************************************************************************************
The "Master Applicator" table/field search buttons were not properly highlighting the
correct lines.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.6 *** 04/16/2019 *************************************************************
When processing a "Parts Return Update" through GSX, the KGB Serial# was not being
uploaded.  This has been fixed, and is added to the "<replacementSerialNumber>" Tag
if the Serial Number is not blank.
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS matches the newly revamped PIMS-Platinum ShopSite Set-up docs.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Return Type" selector on the SRO Parts listing, if GSX is activated In
the system.  A "Return Type" can be directly selected from the Part listing, and the
User is taken directly to the "Update Parts Return" screen for processing.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.5 *** 04/11/2019 *************************************************************
The print engine for Forms Designer has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
When "auto-loading" an associated In-House Warranty, the prompt window was not easy to 
move on smaller monitors.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When displaying the ORDER MARGIN STATISTICS on an Order by clicking the "Adjust Pricing"
button, the "ITEMS TOTAL PROFIT" field would read zero if all items had zero Cost.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The number text "1:", "2:", and "3:" on the Order entry "Attachments" page did not Adjust
when the window was resized.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On occasion, when entering a product to an Order, the backorder ON-HAND prompt could 
display twice.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS-Platinum applications (apps) are now being "Developer Signed" with Apple's newest
security requirements.  This allows PIMS to act in accordance with Apple's new
"Gatekeeper" requirements (Mojave and up).  Windows PC versions are unaffected.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.4 *** 04/04/2019 *************************************************************
When printing a Workorder, some combinations of Windows O/S and printers were cutting off
part of the left side.  We have tried to compensate for this.
******************************************************************************************
When downloading Orders from ShopSite, the creditcard "CVC" number (if available) is
downloaded (for offline processing).  For security reasons, this number can only be
downloaded once.  Subsequent downloads will replace it with "***".
******************************************************************************************
More in depth error reporting in failed ACC transaction attempt is now returned by the
function calling it.  You may now get an error-code from Apple when connections are
flat-out refused, as apposed to nothing at all.
******************************************************************************************
When you load a Serial# with Order Bypass Data to an Order, you can no longer pick it
from the line-item entry page Serial Number chooser.  You must entered the Serial#
directly into the line-item Part Code field and load it that way.  This is because this
is a unique item, and must not be mixed with other items (QTYs greater than 1).
******************************************************************************************
More ACC/GSX compatibility.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.1.2 *** 04/01/2019 *************************************************************
There is a new option in the ShopSite settings called

	"ADD 'SelectedOption' TO LINE-ITEM DESCRIPTION"
	
If checked, the text representing the chosen option for that item will be added to the
Order.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in the ShopSite settings called "REMOVE 'VENDOR' FROM KEYWORDS".
When checked, the "Vendor Name" will be removed from the Keywords before being uploaded to
ShopSite.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing an Order (PDF/HTML) to a Customer prior to initially saving it, certain
routines were not running like they do when printing the Order.  This included not running
any associated ACC transactions.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.0.8 *** 03/26/2019 *************************************************************
There is now a "Visit Associated Rental Contract..." function under the Order entry's
"Records" menu.
******************************************************************************************
On a Rental Agreement entry screen, you can now create an outgoing Invoice without any
rental fees.
******************************************************************************************
When loading an item to an Order via the "K.S." button (obsolete), the User is now
taken to the bottom of the line-item listing.
******************************************************************************************
The PIMS/ShopSite Pro settings have been enhanced, and are now compatible with Lexiconn's
"OAuth Bridge Module".
******************************************************************************************
When modifying a Component Inventory record, any Workorder that contains that Component,
and isn't "Completed", will have that Component modified in it's Component listing.
******************************************************************************************
The Order entry screen's "FULFILLMENT ORDER" checkbox is no longer enterable unless
"Sub-Location" processing is activated.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Order line-item entry screen called "LOCATION BYPASS".  When
clicked, you can choose a bypass Location for that line-item to be pulled from.  The 
Inventory figures for the Location selected will be adjusted (both holding and posting),
and not the Location of the Invoice record.  If you have properly set-up the Accounting
Overrides on the Location records, the Inventory account and Cost-Of_Goods account for
that Location will be used for that line-item on the Order's Sales Journal.  The Sale
itself and associated chart-of-account (Income) will still belong to the Location on the
Order, and not use the bypass.
******************************************************************************************
When entering a formula in the Inventory record's "BULK FACTOR" field, it is now possible
to enter decimal numbers (ie: 1/.8).  This was not possible previously.  This now allows
you to package individual associated products large than the original Bulk.
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS is compatible with AppleCare Connect TLS v1.2 for April 1st 2019.
** Note: PIMS-Gold v14045z4 is also compatible...
******************************************************************************************
A new checkbox in Shopsite Settings called "DON'T UPLOAD PRODUCT DESCRIPTION FIELD" now
exists.  When checked, the Inventory record's "DESCRIPTION" text block will not be
uploaded to Shopsite.  In addition to this, a change has been made so that only
"Description" text that's not flagged as "Alert Entry Person" will be uploaded to ShopSite.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.0.7 *** 03/19/2019 *************************************************************
There is a new preference in PIMS Preferences (More/Option-4) called
"Prompt For Serial# On Transfer Quick Location Transfer".  When checked, and an Inventory
record is fagged as Serial# Required, You will be prompted for a Serial# when
scanning/entering a product with that function.  Along with this, and independant of this
preference, you can now enter a Serial# when scanning/entering a product with this
function.  If a single Serial# is located, that product is loaded and the Serial# is added
to the list for that for that line-item.  If successfully loaded by Serial#, you will not
be prompted again for it if required.  If an incorrect Serial# is entered either way, the
Product and Serial# will not be entered and must be rescanned.
******************************************************************************************
When creating a new Order and saving it, the "View Last Order" function would not list it.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.0.6 *** 03/18/2019 *************************************************************
General U.I. cleanup.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue, when the setting to open Orders and SRO from a listing into separate
windows was set, that would cause the SRO entry screen to loose focus when opened from a
listing.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.1.0.4 *** 03/16/2019 *************************************************************
4D v17.1HF1 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
Several Client/Server bugs have been addressed, as well as increased stability.
Existing PIMS-Platinum Client app will automatically update themselves the first time you
connect to this version.  If you have any issues with this automatic Client update, visit
our WEB site ("Downloads") to manually download and replace your PIMS-Platinum Client
folder.
PLEASE NOTE: The minimum System Requirement for the Mac version is "macOS Sierra 10.12.6".
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue on older Windows 7 machines, where after closing an entry screen and
returning to a record listing, the listing window would freeze.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The "List Orders With Items Selling Below Cost" report will now prompt you if you would
like to include items being sold at zero Price (basically given away for free).
******************************************************************************************
When sending backordered items from an Order to an isolated Purchase Order, and using an
alternative Vendor, PIMS would put the Alt. Vendor Code as the Part Code on the newly
created Purchase Order.  This has been fixed.  PIMS now uses that Vendor Code to scan the
associated Inventory record's Alternative Vendor listing for a match.  If found, and an
Alternative Part# exists, PIMS will use that other Part# as your ordering SKU.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Other Reports, Sales" report called "Comprehensive Serial Number Sales
Export".  It will prompt for a date range, and then isolate Invoices to that date.  From
there, you are prompted again to narrow the Invoice listing (like to a specific Customer).
Data from the Order and Serial# record are then exported to a text file.
******************************************************************************************
The "Resend" button on the SRO entry screen would not move when the window was resized.
This caused clicking on  that button not to work.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When a "KGB" Serial# is received for an SRO (either by "Bulk" or Receiving Record), it
will only populate the associated Partt line-items KGB Serial Number field if it is 
already blank.  If not, it is skipped.  Because of this, un posting a Receiving record
will no longer clear the KGB field.
******************************************************************************************
On the Purchase Journal entry screen, if the Purchase Journal is posted, the "POST"
button is renamed "Save".  You can modify the NOTES and DESCRIPTION fields at will, but
you can only modify the PURCHASE ORDER# and INVOICE# fields if they are initially blank.
The only exception is when the PURCHASE ORDER field contains "Auto-Bill".  In this case,
you can modify it.  No related records are updated.
******************************************************************************************
On the Customer record's "Secondary Contacts" page, you can now flag a Contact to receive
e-mailed Orders and/or Statements.  This is in addition to the primary BILL-TO e-Mail
address.  This can be done by checking either the "E-Mail Orders" or "E-Mail Statements"
checkboxes.
******************************************************************************************
A possible issue with SRO Deposit refunds not properly being reflected on the SRO has been
addressed.  Even though it could not be duplicated, it was compensated for anyway.  This
anomaly never affected Accounting or the associated Customer record.  They were fine.
******************************************************************************************
A previous "Interim" release of PIMS caused certain "Edit" menus to disappear, resulting
in the inability to Cut, Copy, and Paste on certain entry screens and dialog boxes.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The Shopsite Pro settings in the WEB Module now has optional fields for setting a separate
USER ID and PASSWORD for the Inventory FTP upload.  You can also enter a bypass XML file
folder as well as a bypass file name.  These should not have to be used, but exist for
situations where there is no choice.
******************************************************************************************
Further enhancements have been made to the Vendor Purchase Order upload APIs.
(still in BETA)
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.1.0.0 *** 03/07/2019 *************************************************************
4D v17.1 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
Several Client/Server bugs have been addressed, as well as increased stability.
Existing PIMS-Platinum Client app will automatically update themselves the first time you
connect to this version.  If you have any issues with this automatic Client update, visit
our WEB site ("Downloads") to manually download and replace your PIMS-Platinum Client
folder.
PLEASE NOTE: The minimum System Requirement for the Mac version is "macOS Sierra 10.12.6".
******************************************************************************************
For qualified Users, Ingram API BETA testing is available.
******************************************************************************************
In PIMS Preferences, the TAB called "Internet/WEB Services Config" has been renamed
"Default E-Mail".
******************************************************************************************
A new sub-menu in the PIMS Preferences menu called "Modify External API Settings..." has
been added.  The USPS Address Verification settings now exist on this screen, as does the
settings for Ingram and TechData APIs.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the Inventory record's "DISTRIBUTOR#:" field title will scan Ingram's database
for the existence of that item (as Ingram SKU), and return pertinent information about it.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the Inventory record's "MODEL#:" field title will scan Ingram's database
for the existence of that item (as Vendor SKU), and return pertinent information about it.
******************************************************************************************
If Ingram processing is set in the system while entering an out-of-stock item onto an
Order, the prompt that asks if you want to backorder it now has a button to check the 
Warehouse stock levels.  This only happens when this product belongs to an API Vendor.
******************************************************************************************
If Ingram processing is set in the system and you click on the Order line-item's
"Location Polling", and this product belongs to an API Vendor, you are prompted as to
wether or not to add Warehouse figures to the listing.
******************************************************************************************
When looking up an Ingram product from the Inventory record, you are now warned if the 
Ingram Part# differs from your Distributor#.
******************************************************************************************
When looking up an Ingram product from the Inventory record, you are now prompted to
update certain information on the Inventory record with that returned from the Ingram
call.
******************************************************************************************
When right-clicking the "VENDOR" from a Product Purchase Worksheet, and "Ingram"
processing is enabled (and this product belongs to an Ingram API), warehouse quantities
are added to the listing displayed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a Warehouse field on the Purchase Order line-item page for those using Ingram 
processing.  You can click on the field title to choose from a list of Ingram Warehouses.
	** Available quantities are shown as well...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in MFG Preferences called:

	"Allocate/Add Products To Newest Workorders First"
	
When checked, PIMS will attempt to allocate and/or add to the most resent Workorders as
opposed to the oldest first.
******************************************************************************************
Workorder "Backorder Allocation" processes have been enhanced.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking screen buttons on the Service/Repair Module's splash-screen, you can now
have multiple windows open.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking "History" items on the Service/Repair Module's splash-screen, you can now
have multiple windows open.
******************************************************************************************
When visiting an Order from an SRO, and clicking 'Cancel' on the Order, and error message
was mistakingly displayed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.0.0.0i 02/14/2019 ****************************************************************
There was an issue moving an item from one Purchase Order to another, where the wrong
Alternant Vendor could be listed.  The sort order of the line-items could be disrupted as
well.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue introduced in v17000h that caused the Order entry screen's
"Manipulate Line-Items" to malfunction.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 17.0.0.0h 02/11/2019 ****************************************************************
When loading a Vendor Payment check, it no longer defaults to all transactions and
total owed.  This happened under certain circumstances (actually fixed in v17000c).
******************************************************************************************
In the Service/Repair Module, the "Find By SRO#..." now displays the SRO found and not
the SRO in a listing.
******************************************************************************************
From a Bank Reconciliation screen, you can now write a missing Check or make a missing
Deposit.  Make sure you choose the corresponding Bank Account, as it is not defaulted.
******************************************************************************************
A "Record History" has been added to the Workorder in the Assembly Module.  To view the
history of a specific Workorder, select "View Workorder History..." from the "Functions"
menu.  Obviously, history starts collecting with this version of PIMS and not prior.
******************************************************************************************
There were occasional issues adding a "Banner" to certain Calendars.  This has been
addressed.
******************************************************************************************
In addition to the "List All Cards Run..." function under the "Pay'Types" menu, the 
following has been added:
			List Cards Run By Date Range...
			Search Editor...
******************************************************************************************
When checking for an In-House Warranty from the SRO screen, you are now offered a List
of Serial Numbers to choose from the Equipment listing.  If no Equipment exists on that
SRO, the the previous Serial# prompt is displayed.  Holding down the SHIFT key when
running this function will also provide the original prompt.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an ICON on the SRO Equipment line, that when clicked, will scan for an
In-House Warranty (IHW).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in SRO Preferences called "SCAN FOR IN-HOUSE-WARRANTY WHEN SERIAL#
ENTERED".  If checked, and an Equipment Serial# is entered on an SRO, the system will
automatically scan for an In-House Warranty.
******************************************************************************************
When the "Apply Credit" button is clicked on the Order entry screen, the User is now
warned if they try and apply a Deposit that is not directly associated with that
particular Order.  If they decide that it was a bad idea, the process is canceled.
However, they are given the opportunity to continue and apply it anyway.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, if you change the Location Code to one that differs from the Location the SRO
is being created from, the local Location Code will become a suffix of the SRO Number.
This only occurs if the "Locations" Module is present.
******************************************************************************************
A User that belonged to the Password Group "CAN'T ISSUE RETURNS" could still do so through
the "Manipulate Lines-Items" function.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with posting a return on an Invoice, and then un-posting that return.
This could cause the amount being held on the associated Inventory record to go negative.
This has been fixed.  Thanks Kevin in Indiana!
******************************************************************************************
The "Manipulate Line-Items" function now displays up to three lines high, if necessary.
The "Product Name" is now based on the "Description" field directly from the Order and
not the products Inventory name.
******************************************************************************************
The "Tag-Line" on the Payment Type entry screen can now be up to 998 characters.  Clicking
the "SIGNATURE TAG LINE (998 Chrs Max):" title will display a larger entry area.  Holding
the SHIFT key down while clicking will default the text to a standard creditcard verbiage.
******************************************************************************************
The new "eSignature Required" on the Order entry has been enhanced.  It now works like the
SRO in that you are prompted whether or not to capture the signature at that time, as well
as the addition of using that Payment Type's "Tag Line" as an electronic agreement that
the Customer must agree to.
******************************************************************************************
Work has been done to Data-Sync to better insure that record packets are processed in the
correct order.
******************************************************************************************
On a new SRO record, the "DON'T PROCESS 'COMPONENT CHECK'" defaults to checked (True).
******************************************************************************************
Under certain circumstances on some Mac O/S versions, the uploading of GSX Parts might
upload those Parts that are unchecked in the listing.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When ordering STOCK items from an SRO, there were occasions when not all Parts would make
it to Purchase Orders.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Order entry screen's "Functions" menu called 
"View Last CED Transaction...".  When selected, a complete detail of the last Cayan
transaction on that Order is displayed.  After that information is displayed, you are
prompted to verify that transaction at Cayan to make sure it was recorded at Cayan.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to have multiple Serial Numbers on a single Rental Agreement line-item.
******************************************************************************************
Under the Inventory entry screen's "Rental" menu, there's a new function called:
"Rental/Duplicate To Rental...".  When run, you are prompted for a Location Code and
Quantity.  If confirmed, the current Inventory record is duplicated, and "r" is aded as a
suffix to it's Part#, the Description has "(Rental)" affixed to the end, The Location
"ON-HAND" is set to the Quantity you entered, and the necessary Rental flags are set.
The original Inventory record's ON-HAND for that Location is decreased by the Quantity
entered.  No accounting takes place, as your Inventory valuation is unchanged.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "BUSINESS/SCHOOL" designation on the Rental Agreement entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
Proper "RTO" (Rent-To-Own) functions are being added to PIMS-Platinum in the near future,
so keep looking...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.0.0.0b 12/14/2018 ****************************************************************
When a User now runs the "Apply Credit" function on an Invoice and elects not to refund
any balance due, they will be prompted for an explanation as why they didn't.  This
explanation is then placed in the Order History area.
******************************************************************************************
Some SRO "Saving" functions were not performed when an SRO was flagged as completed and
then sent directly to an Invoice.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu called
"Export Tier 'S-Code' Codes...".  This is used for updating the exported file and
re-importing it.
******************************************************************************************
The Order's built-in currency converter has been temporarily disabled for security
reasons.  We will find a better converter to switch to in the future...
******************************************************************************************
This version retires the PIMS "SigPad" functions and compatibility.  Instead, the
Payment Type's "eSignature" checkbox will now cause a CED (Customer Engagement Device)
to prompt for a signature for that Payment field.  This is done when saving/printing the
Invoice.  This is similar to the function on the SRO screen.  No creditcard processing
is needed.  That said, this will work in conjunction with a Payment Type flagged a
"Processing Required" although not required.  Currently, this only works with CEDs from
Cayan.
******************************************************************************************
Various dialog windows that prompt for information throughout PIMS lacked the ability to
allow data to be pasted into them.  This has been addressed where found.  If we missed
some, let us know.  Thanks Chris in Indiana!
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.0.0.0a 12/06/2018 ****************************************************************
There was an issue when displaying "WEB" pages inside of PIMS.  This started occurring in 
v17000.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When running the "SearchEditor" in PIMS, the ClipBoard is no longer replaced with the 
search criteria code.  For those API developers that need this, simply hold down the 
SHIFT key when clicking the "Search" button on that screen.
******************************************************************************************
Some of the "Request" dialog windows would not allow you to paste data into them.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "ESTIMATED BALANCE:" field displayed on the SRO screen (Worked Performed
page).  This field is equal to the SRO Estimated dollar amount minus any Deposits booked
on that SRO.
******************************************************************************************
The Purchase Order Vendor Reconciliation page now has the same green dots on its products
listing as the Order.  Double-Clicking on a dot will display a history of any manual QTY
changes.
******************************************************************************************
The standard PIMS SearchEditor now has two additional Comparators:
	Is Within The Last X Days
	Is Older Than X Days
These new Comparators only work with "Date" fields.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 17.0.0.0 11/20/2018 *****************************************************************
v17.0.0.0 is a new generation of PIMS, based on the v17 version of 4D.  It's still called
"PIMS-Platinum", as the PIMS-Platinum v16.0.0.0 series.  There is a performance increase,
as well as heightened security measures.  On the windows PC platform previous to the
v17000 series, only the PIMS server app was 64-bit.  The Demo and Clients were 32-bit.
Now all PIMS-Platinum v17.n.n.n apps on all supported platforms are 64-bit.
It is functionally the same as PIMS-Platinum v16.0.0.0s, at this initial release.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0s 11/20/2018 ****************************************************************
A new function called "GSX Invoice Reconciliation - BETA..." has been added to the
Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu (for qualified Users).  The Password Group to Access
this is "GSX_INVOICE_RECONCILIATION".
******************************************************************************************
On the Purchase Order entry screen, there is a new function under the "Functions" menu
called "Import Items Text File...".  It will import a text file of valid PIMS products
onto the Purchase Order.  The file format is as follows:
	Part Code
	Quantity
	Cost
The file must be a TAB delimited text file, with a carriage-return at the end of 
each line.
******************************************************************************************
Creditcards are now processed on Invoices created by "Billing Templates".  The processors
supported are Authorize.net and PayTrace (including by Customer Codes on file).  Cayan
and the others are currently not supported.  A log file called
"Process Billing Invoices Log.txt" is saved at the root-level of the program.  This file
shows what happened for each Invoice created and processed.  When processing is finished,
the list of orders processed is displayed along with the log file location on the disk.
If a creditcard was declined or otherwise not run, then the Order type is set to a 
Salesorder and not an Invoice.  These Orders are not automatically e-mailed to Customers.
However, you only need to select them from the listing and select the e-mail function at
the bottom of the Order listing.  This way, you can correct those that need attention 
first.
******************************************************************************************
In ExecUtron's ongoing attempt to facilitate our special-needs Users, the checkbox called
"SERIAL# INCLUDED IN FINISHED PRODUCT" will no longer be displayed unless the 
Assembly Module is activated and in use.  This is found on the Order's full line-item
entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0r 10/10/2018 ****************************************************************
When using the "Manipulate Line-Items" function on an Order, the Shipping amount was
copied over to the new Order when refunding an item from a posted Invoice.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Under "Maintenance" in the Import/Export Module, the "Rebuild Certain Sales Activity..."
has been renamed "Rebuild Certain Record Activity...", and has been updated for maximum
accuracy for Manufacturers.
******************************************************************************************
For "Apple Resellers", there is a new button on the SRO screen ("Parts" page) called
"Assign Tier-Code".  Once you have an Equipment product entered on line one of the
Equipment sub-listing (page 2), and have looked it up in GSX (Warranty Info) thus
establishing a qualified Apple product name, you can click this button to display a list
of associated Tier ("S") codes to choose from.  If selected, this code will be added to
the SRO Parts listing.  This list comes from an import of a text file containing these
codes.  This can be obtained from your Authorized PIMS Reseller (Apple Specialist).
The file can be imported using the "Update Tier Codes..." menu function under the "GSX"
menu.  This replaces all current codes with the new ones.
******************************************************************************************
Many of the "View Last nnn Record" functions stopped working in Platinum.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Apple Invoice "Reconciliation" function, currently in BETA.
Contact your Authorized PIMS Reseller (Apple Specialist) for more information.
******************************************************************************************
When printing and using "Open In Preview" on Mac, the Mac print-dialog window would stay
open on O/S Sierra and High Sierra.  This only affected Forms Designer templates.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
For "Apple Resellers", there is a new function (in BETA right now) that will automatically
alert the User that an "ACSH..." code was returned from a "Carry-In" GSX upload.  The 
User is then prompted to add this qualified "ACSH..." code to the SRO Parts listing.  This
takes the guess work out of this need, and insures that the Customer is billed properly,
and that Apple Invoice Reconciliation goes smoother.  Contact your Authorized PIMS 
Reseller (Apple Specialist) for more information.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0q 09/08/2018 ****************************************************************
There was an issue where some terminals could not recognize it's own "plug-ins", and told
the User there were none available to run.  This also affected "Start-Up" plug-in
functions.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On a Vendor Payment Check screen, PIMS no longer defaults all transactions as "Pay".
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0p 09/03/2018 ****************************************************************
There is a new button on the Forms Designer entry screen called
"Place Auto-Barcode Field".  When clicked, you can choose between 60 different automatic
barcode types (including QR and UPC).  Barcodes that require calculations and Checksums
will be calculated automatically.  Once chosen, a field will be added in the upper left
of the screen.  You can then double-click on that field and assign the source of the data
(field, static text, etc).  You MUST NOT CHANGE ANYTHING on that object except for source
and sizing.  No barcode fonts are required...
******************************************************************************************
On the "More Info" TAB of the Inventory entry screen, there is a new function that will
use an external image server to generate a fully qualified UPC barcode image.  You will be
prompted for a UPC code (defaults to Inventory "BARCODE" field), of either 11 or 12
characters.  "11" is without the "checksum", and "12" is with checksum.  If there's no
UPC checksum, then one is generated for you.  This image can then be used with Forms
Designer to print UPC barcodes for your products.
******************************************************************************************
Just like Orders, an SRO listing now allows you to view several SROs at once.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0m 08/30/2018 ****************************************************************
"View Last Customer" stopped working in Platinum, and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Nightly Function (run after Back-up) called "EXPORT MONTH-ENDING A/R".  if
checked, at the last day of the month PIMS will export your current Accounts Receivable
figures to  a text file.  This text file is compatible with Excel and is located in a 
folder on the server called "MONTHLY A/R EXPORT".  If the folder doesn't exist on the 
DeskTop, PIMS will automatically crearte it.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO entry screen now has a "LOCATED" field right under the "Completed" date.  This
optional field is where you can designate where the finished repair is stored for pick-up.
This field also displays on the standard SRO listing.
******************************************************************************************
The GSX "Price Options" function for Batteries and Displays is fully implemented now, and
is out of BETA.
******************************************************************************************
The Location Code has been added to the GSX Settings entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0k 08/21/2018 ****************************************************************
Fixed pop-up selector for Customer "Shipper" on Customer record.
******************************************************************************************
Double-clicking on a Choice-List selector will now load the item and close the window.
******************************************************************************************
The engine for Historical A/R Reporting has been rebuilt.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function called "List Customers With Manual A\R Entries...".  It's under
the "A/R" menu in EDC Accounting.  It will also list the "Odd Things" entries for manual
A/R as well.
******************************************************************************************
The "Eraser" buttons on the Rental Agreement entry screen have been changed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Sort Arrow" for the Order Listing's "ORDER#" now uses a formula to sort numerically,
even if the ORDER# contains text.  This slows that sort function down a bit on slower
machines.
******************************************************************************************
Some graphical UI fixes.
******************************************************************************************
The GSX "Price Options" function for Batteries and Displays is implemented in BETA form
in this version.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0j 08/01/2018 ****************************************************************
The "WEB Portal" part of the Cayan transaction used when the CED is not available was
malfunctioning on Windows PC version of PIMS.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Fetch Record" API was not returning large "Text" field data (line "Description" for
Order line-items).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When going to "Other Menus", an additional "Edit" menu was displayed.  This has been
corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in NIGHTLY ACTIVITIES called "RESTART SERVER".  When checked, this
function will automatically restart the current running PIMS Server application after the
Back-Up process and associated activities are complete.
******************************************************************************************
MasterCard and Discover cards now require "partial authorizations" is the case arrises.
PIMS now takes this into account with Cayan, even if Cayan is set not to accept Partials.
MasterCard and Discover will override Cayan, but PIMS will warn you and let you void them.
******************************************************************************************
Duplicate Serial Numbers entered on a Receiving line-item are now filtred-out and removed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the Inventory Transfer screen and Location code selection.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A new internal print engine has been installed that fixes a few minor print issues on the
newer Mac operating systems.
******************************************************************************************
Work has been done to the "ProcessSRO" API.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0e 07/11/2018 ****************************************************************
The PIMS-Platinum plug-in engine has been modified.  It is possible that any plug-ins you
currently possess might need to be recompiled by us.
******************************************************************************************
There was a problem using the manual Cayan "WEB Portal" on Windows PC (okay on Mac).  It
stated that "Third Party Cookies Disabled", regardless of O/S settings.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Authentication systems are now in place for "Mobile POS (WEB/iOS) Terminals" via API.
******************************************************************************************
Various bug fixes.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a plug-in tie to allow returning more than you have in-stock of an item on
an RMA.  This should be used with caution!
******************************************************************************************
The discount Order line-item text "** Everyday Lowest Price..." can now be changed via
a plug-in.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0a 06/15/2018 ****************************************************************
Updates to Data-Access APIs.
******************************************************************************************
When sending an SRO to an Order, you can no longer click the "CANCEL" button on the
Order during that process.  You must finish any minimum requirements on the Order and
click "SAVE".
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer use the "Closebox" on the Order entry screen to close (Cancel) the
Order.  In this day and age, there are too many things to trap for when closing and
Order entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
The "WEB_FETCH_LISTING" API routine failed if the search string Base64 contained a "+"
sign.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************



**** 16.0.0.0 05/25/2018 *****************************************************************

PIMS-Platinum initial Release:
This is a new generation of PIMS, based on the v16 version of 4D.
It's the first 64-Bit PIMS application for Macintosh (always available for Windows), and
has a significant performance increase along with compatibility will the current versions
of the Mac and Windows O/S.  Please read the "System Requirements" for PIMS-Platinum to
insure your equipment is capable of running this version.
******************************************************************************************

THIS VERSION REQUIRES THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM MEMORY:

	Mac Server - 12GB
	Windows Server - 12GB
	Mac/Windows Clients and Single-User - 8GB
	
Please refer to System Requirements on our WEB site (www.executron.com).
******************************************************************************************
From the main splash-screen, most menu functions now run in their own process.  This means
you can have multiple records and reports open at the same time.  USE CAUTION however,
and don't get carried away.  Remember, if you have a record open no one else can access
that record.  This includes other PIMS processes like posting, updating, etc.
******************************************************************************************
The following functions have been moved to "PIMS Tools":
	Reload Startup Plug-Ins
	Analyse Locked Record...
	Odd Things File
	List All Search-Editor Templates...
******************************************************************************************
The following main File menu functions have been moved to a new "POS Tools" menu, as
new sub-menus:
	Open Cash Drawer
	Clear CED...
	Reset Receipt Monitor Window...
******************************************************************************************
The engine inside PIMS-Platinum to process and run plug-ins has been enhanced.  It is now
faster and more powerful.  Your existing plug-ins (SQL and Gold) should run fine without
conversion.  However, if the need arrises, there is a new PIMS Preference (Defaults/More,
Options-4) called "Use Legacy Plug-In Technology".  If checked, the prior method still
exists to run older plug-ins that are having difficulties running under the new management.
******************************************************************************************
The "New Version" badge on the main Splash-Screen now only shows on the Client app, and
not any of the "Single-User" versions.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new submenu under the main "File" menu called "Window".  It contains some other
functions to manage all of the open windows.
******************************************************************************************
Apple changed the "GSX Repairs Look-up" without telling anyone.  PIMS-Gold/Platinum has
been modified to match.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new PIMS WEB APIs:
	FetchJSONrecordList
	FetchJSONrecord
These allow qualified and licensed Users to extract pretty much and data out of PIMS, for
integration with other systems (JSON or XML formats).
******************************************************************************************
There is a now a setting to allow for the use of a default "Salesperson" code when
sending an SRO to an Order.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in SRO Preferences to flag a GSX SRO as "Completed" when that SRO
is sent to an Order.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer send an SRO to an Order if that SRO has no money owed and a Deposit is
taken on that SRO.  The Deposit(s) must be refunded first.
******************************************************************************************
For Apple Users who have the Remove "S" function set, you can now load an item by serial#
onto an Order by Serial# and have that "S" removed if no initial Serial# is found.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order, Receiving Record, SRO, and RMA entry screens, you can now load an Employee
by clicking on the field label text next to the code field (if underlined).  To do this,
you must belong to the "SELECT_RECORD_EMPLOYEE" Password Group.  Along with this, you can
no longer expect a list of Employees when partially entering an Employee Code.  This is 
for security purposes.
******************************************************************************************
When printing Receipts (to STAR printer tested), printing two copies is now handled by
issues a "Number Of Copies" as "2" and not performing two separate print jobs.  This
affords better compatibility with printer.  Be sure and make sure your printer is set to
"Cut Options" as "Page Cut Type" - Partial Cut and "Document Cut Type - Partial Cut.
******************************************************************************************
Some issues with random crashing when switching menu bars has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A set of options has been added to SRO Preferences to allow you to choose which Employee
is loaded as the default Salesperson Code on an Order created from an SRO.  The available
options load in reverse order of the checkboxes listed as options.
******************************************************************************************
This version is compatible with Cayan and the creditcard industry's abolishment of
signatures on April 30th 2018.
******************************************************************************************
URLs for Apple GSX sites have been updated in the GSX processing section of the SRO.
******************************************************************************************
Apple GSX Updates:
 Create Carry-In Repair - Added Pricing Options (on SRO Parts entry screen)
 Create Return Before Replace Repair - Added Pricing Options (on SRO Parts entry screen)
 Create Mail-In Repair - Removed "Shipper" and "Tracking Numbers"
 Create Indirect Onsite Repair - Added Pricing Options (on SRO Parts entry screen)
 Create Repair or Replace - Removed "Shipper" and "Tracking Numbers"
 Create NRE Repair - Added "SRN" code (Screening)
 Update Carry-In Repair - Added Pricing Options (on SRO Parts entry screen)
 Update Return Before Replace Repair - Added Pricing Options (on SRO Parts entry screen)
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer take SRO Deposits if the SRO has been sent to an Order and/or is
Completed.
******************************************************************************************
A new "Main Splash Bar" splash-screen has been developed.  It's pretty much the stock
splash-screen, but only 300 pixels wide and on the left-hand side of the screen.
******************************************************************************************
Splash-screens for other Modules have been freshened up a bit, and now remain where you
park them.
******************************************************************************************
Minor aesthetic fixes.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called "View Each Order Separately From Order Listing".
When checked, double-clicking on an Order from an Order listing will display that Order
in it's own process (window).  In that way, you can open multiple Orders at once from a
single Order listing.
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By P.O. Number..." did not allow you to paste something in when prompted.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
You can now work between Modules at the same time.  More Modules can now have more
functions open at once.  A few exceptions are any functions that write a "Check", for
numbering circumstances.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue in Client/Server when printing/e-mailing SRO Estimates that could cause
Order numbers to be skipped and not consecutive.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
when printing SRO Estimates, the print-spooler name would say "Worksheet".  It now says
"SRO Estimate".
******************************************************************************************
Clicking at the lower right-hand side of the Service/Repair Module's "History" section
would return the User to the main Splash-Screen.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
4D v16.3H2 is now in use for data storage and Client/Server communication.
******************************************************************************************
Some memory leaks have been plugged.
******************************************************************************************
General bug fixes...
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating Orders, the "CREATED DATE" was not updated to the current date.  This
has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
On the "Held Items Report", to use the "Set Inventory To Order/W.O/SRO Quantities"
function the User must now belong to the "INVENTORY RECONCILIATION" Password Group.
******************************************************************************************
Under the "Window" menu item (File menu), "Cascade Windows" has been removed.
******************************************************************************************
Record management (Locking) has been improved for the function "History" on the
Splash-Screen.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Test Search Script..." has been added to the WEB Module's "Tools"
menu.  It allows you to test a Base64'd Search String.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new FTP function in "PIMS Tools" that will allow you to download older versions
of PIMS (if needed).  It will also let you download Mac versions of files that are having
issues with your Mac's "Gatekeeper" security.
******************************************************************************************
On some GSX processing dialog windows, it's now easier to select a line for modification.
******************************************************************************************
More GSX dialog windows have been centered on the screen.
******************************************************************************************
When posting a Receiving Record with Serial Numbers, the associated Purchase Order#
(if one exists) will be added to a new field on the associated Serial Number record.
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By E-Mail..." function under the "Customers" menu now has a single field to
enter the E-Mail address into.
******************************************************************************************
On the Customer listing, the "REGION" field has been replaced with the E-Mail" address.
******************************************************************************************
On the Service/Repair Module's splash-screen "History" area, double-clicking on an item
now works like the main splash-screen and loads the item into it's own process.  In
addition, double-clicking on an SRO# will display the record and not initially display it
in a listing.
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By SRO#..." function in the Service/Repair Module did not allow you to paste in
an SRO#.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A "Produce Customer Listing..." function has been added to the SRO listing
(bottom pop-menu).
******************************************************************************************
The "FetchJSONrecordList" API has been modified to allow for one Table to be searched,
and related Table data to be returned (ie:  Search for line-items, and return Invoices).
******************************************************************************************
The various record "Choosers" would not properly perform "Keyword" searches on Customer
or Attn. data.  This has been fixed (they worked in PIMS-Gold").  The same is true for
any "Keyword" field on most record entry.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference (Defaults/More, Options-4) called
"Use Global Splash-Screen Settings (not Terminal Specific)".  When checked, PIMS will
look to these Preferences to determine what Main Splash-Screen and associated User
Picture/WEB Site to display.  It will no longer be "Terminal Specific" with this checked.
******************************************************************************************
If a Customer owes you an A/R "Balance Due" greater than or equal to zero, then the User
is prompted before allowing an "Apply Credit" to take place.  Basically, if a Customer has
a credit on their account (including Deposits) and they have an outstanding balance they
owe you greater than or equal to any credits (a Debit balance), then you are warned of
this.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Serial Number entry screen called "Modify Order Bypass Data".
When clicked, it will display a window where you can enter optional Order overrides for
that specific serialized product.  This includes no less than Cost, Price, Category Code,
Sub-Category Code, Vendor, etc.  An optional Alert can also be displayed to the User
of the Order it's entered on.  This bypass override data will only be processed if the 
associated Product is entered on an Order by entering the Serial# in the Order line-item 
PART CODE field (load by Serial Number).  It will not work from the usual Serial# Chooser.
******************************************************************************************
Canadian Users can now put items on an RMA record without having them in-stock.  This
is to allow for the refunding of any taxes applied during the original purchase.
******************************************************************************************
Any function that dealt with the saving/e-mailing of PDF documents didn't work.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
"Help" menu points to In-App Support WEB site (currently under construction).
******************************************************************************************
The "Sales Margin Report" would hide the Order listing behind the main window when 
drilling-down".  This has been fixed, and you can now double-click on more than one
employee to produce their Order listing.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the "Date" and "Time" search scripts generated for API use.
These have been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The API responses did not "quote" the "DATA" field.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
In the Service/Repair Module, "coveredByACPlus" has been added to the "Mail-In"
creation window, and is used in that API call to GSX.  A line-item is not needed.
******************************************************************************************
The Custom Splash-Screen choices are now limited to the default, User picture, and User
WEB site options.  The two former custom options can now enjoy screen button Assinments
as well as limited resizing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu in the WEB Services Module to aid API Developers with Table/Field
access, as well as automatic field data generation.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new PIMS WEB APIs:
	FetchJSONrecordList
	FetchJSONrecord
These allow qualified and licensed Users to extract pretty much and data out of PIMS, for
integration with other systems (JSON or XML formats).
******************************************************************************************
The "POS Terminal" has been cleaned up a bit.
******************************************************************************************
The Currency Con verter functions have been updated.
******************************************************************************************
The internal Calendar engine has been updated to 64-bit on Mac.
******************************************************************************************
The "POS Terminal" has been cleaned up a bit.  It can now expand sideways as well.
******************************************************************************************
The "Open Window" widget window now has a "Cascade" button.
******************************************************************************************
Data-Sync processes have passed their initial testing.
******************************************************************************************
Order Numbers were not assigning properly when multiple Orders were being displayed.
This has been fixed..
******************************************************************************************
The "Window List" function now displays a floating window that displays all open windows
in realtime.  Click once on a window in the list to make it the formost window.
******************************************************************************************
The "BETA" version now contains a demo Datafile.
******************************************************************************************
Updates to either the Server, BETA, or Single-User will now remember the previous
Datafile location (if one exists).  This is true even for the BETA, which comes with it's
own Datafile built-in.
******************************************************************************************
The default Forms Designer templates have been updated in the BETA version.
******************************************************************************************
The "Check For Updates..." function has been modified for this version.
******************************************************************************************
In the Service/Repair Module, "coveredByACPlus" has been added to the "Mail-In"
creation window, and is used in that API call to GSX.  A line-item is not needed.
******************************************************************************************
Canadian Users can now put items on an RMA record without having them in-stock.  This
is to allow for the refunding of any taxes applied during the original purchase.
******************************************************************************************
The "Sales Margin Report" would hide the Order listing behind the main window when 
drilling-down".  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the small PIMS-Platinum logo on the main splash-screen will take you to the
current PIMS-Platinum BETA page (not yet released).  This will show you current System
Requirements and Version History for PIMS-Platinum.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************
Using the "Down-Arrow" key on the Keyword Search dialog-box would cause PIMS to quit, on
Mac O/S Sierra and High Sierra.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
Printing an SRO Estimate in Client/Server could cause the Order numbering system to skip
Order numbers in sequence.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Initial BETA with converted PIMS-Gold code, with minor bug fixes.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.4.5/70.0.4.5 01/05/2017 ********************************************************

Please Note:
This is the "Sunset" version of PIMS-Gold.  This means that it will be the last official
Update for PIMS-Gold.  No worries as PIMS-Gold will still be supported for years to come.
There will simply be no more work done to PIMS-Gold.  That said, PIMS-Gold is being
replaced with PIMS-Platinum next year (sold as subscription).
******************************************************************************************

THIS VERSION REQUIRES THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM MEMORY:

	Mac Server - 8GB
	Windows Server (64bit) - 12GB
	Mac/Windows Clients - 4GB (8GB recommended)
	
Please refer to System Requirements on our WEB site (www.executron.com).
******************************************************************************************
There was a problem with the Cayan processing window and "Declined" transactions that
would make it look like PIMS was frozen.  This was created in v14044, and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue introduced in v14044 related to e-mailing Orders as "PDF" from an
Order listing.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
You can now cancel an SRO after adding a Customer from it.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


	
**** 14.0.4.4/70.0.4.4 12/29/2017 ********************************************************
Addressed a problem where on rare occasions a Location's SRO Deposit would be temporarily
double the A/R entries on the Customer A/R Ledger card.  This did not affect accounting,
and seemed to be a Data-Sync issue only.  It would clear itself...
******************************************************************************************
Holding down the SHIFT key while performing a "Find By Customer" SRO search will display
the original search text prompt from previous versins.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO "Find By Service Tech..." has been reverted back to the way it was in previous
versions.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the WEB Server to allow for URL variable processing during a
"POST" call.
******************************************************************************************
An rare issue with possible double Deposit entries on a Customer record has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
An "Eligible For AppleCare" associated "S" Code field has been added to the Inventory
"Service" area.
******************************************************************************************
The "ON-HAND" field on the Inventory Listing is now left-justified.  This helps with
larger numbers.
******************************************************************************************
Forms Designer has been updated to be Apple High Sierra compatible.
******************************************************************************************
On rare occasions, the Order line-item's "APP/IHW Info..." button would not appear when it
should.  This usually had to do with a Location's Order being opened and processed at the
MAIN.
******************************************************************************************
The e-mailing of SRO "Status" updates has had a performance increase.  There is also a
dialogbox displayed in the background while the e-mail is being sent.  You should not
attempt to reopen the SRO until this dialogbox clears.  In addition, the SRO is locked
while e-mailing is taking place.  During e-mailing of Status updates, you may go about
your business as usual.  You just can't reopen that specific SRO until e-mailing is
finished.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO "Status" field can no longer accept manually typed-in text if defaults exist in
Service Preferences.  If push comes to shove, there is a plug-in bypass...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button at the bottom of the Forms Designer template listing called
"Duplicate Selected Template".  This will duplicate the selected template, and put
"-dup'd" in it's name.  Only one record at a time can be duplicated.
******************************************************************************************
A new menu function called "Find SROs With Cost > Price" can be found under the SRO menu.
******************************************************************************************
A powerful new menu function called "Search By Part Line-Items..." has been added to the
SRO menu.
******************************************************************************************
The stock SRO Template had a misspelling, and has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
Now when the SRO GSX Reference ("G" Code) is manually entered and not run through GSX as
it should be, a checkbox titled "Manual" is set (next to "GSX CONFIRMATION" field).  This
checkbox can not be manually altered.  The internal name of the checkbox field is
"GCODE_MANUALLY_ENTERED".  To go with this, there is a new SRO find function called
"Find All Manual 'G' Codes..." under the SRO menu.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer enter a negative discount on a Receipt Journal, not that you would...
******************************************************************************************
Those who have the ability to change a Part# on an Order found that by blanking-out that
Part# first and then loading a new item by Description the original item would not
"un-hold" first.  This has been addressed, and a new plug-in is not required.
******************************************************************************************
SRO "Estimates" are now stored in the SRO's Document Storage when printed or e-mailed.
They are stored as PDF documents.  This is for Macintosh only...
******************************************************************************************
If you manually create a Receiving Record (not recommended!!), you are no longer prompted
when you modify the QTY field (over-posting warning).
******************************************************************************************
Steps have been made to curb any rare "Duplicate Key" errors in Data-Sync, when using less
than perfect networks after power failures.
******************************************************************************************
There was a phantom window that appeared after running certain reports in a particular 
order.  This has been addressed.  (happened only on Mac)
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating cascading Inventory records (one after the other), the Keyword Search
function would only find the first and last occurrence of the duplicated records.  They 
would only show up if they were opened and then saved.  Other than that, they were fine.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when the "REPAIRED BY" Technician was entered onto an SRO that had a
bypass APPLE ID associated with their record.  If entered, and the SRO wasn't saved first,
the subsequent GSX upload would upload the default "APPLE ID" for the system and not the
Employee's bypass.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue on the SRO's GSX "Parts Return" window where you couldn't select the
required pop-menus on Sierra OS.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If an Inventory item has a minimum purchase amount, that will be used as the default QTY
when adding it to a manual Purchase Order.  If you attempt to override this default, you
will be prompted.
******************************************************************************************
If a signature for an SRO Estimate was taken on one SRO and not on the one after, then
the previous signature might print again.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On rare occasions when taking a Deposit on an SRO, the Customer record wasn't being
updated.  This only happened if the Customer was taking too long to run their creditcard.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to globally assign a "Repaired By" Tech to a listing of SROs.  This
is done from the new "Assign" menu on the SRO listing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on the Employee record called "Technician".  This designates this
Employee as a Technician.  This flag can be globally assigned through the new "Assign"
menu on the Employee listing.  Along with this, there are two new "Employees" menu
functions:  "List All Technicians..." and "List All Except Technicians...".
******************************************************************************************
"WEB Users" now Data-Sync between Location/MAIN and MAIN/Location.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO Parts entry screen now has a "Location Polling" button similar to that found on
the Order line-item.
******************************************************************************************
It was possible to pass bad characters in an ACC call from the Order.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Apple GSX "Consignment" functions have been added to PIMS.  Please Note:  Users using
the "Sub-Locations" feature can not use these Consignment features, as it's not compatible
with this environment.
******************************************************************************************
Clever Salespeople managed to find a way of canceling a Cayan CED transaction mid-stream.
This would cause a Transaction be to processed by Cayan, but not reflected in PIMS.  This
can be addressed.  However, an Employee an still "Force-Quit" the PIMS application for
which we have no control (fire them!).
******************************************************************************************
When an Order is voided, the link to any SRO is severed.
******************************************************************************************
You can now add a comment when e-mailing a Customer Statement from their record.
******************************************************************************************
"Employees" now transfer from Location to MAIN in Data-Sync, when modified.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function called "List Unassigned SROs..." under the SROs menu.  When
selected, you will be prompted for a Date Range and then all SROs without a "Repaired By"
technician will be listed.  "Canceled", "Completed", and "Billed" SROs will not be listed.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer delete SROs that are associated with an Invoice.
******************************************************************************************
Under certain circumstances, Serial Numbers would not print on consolidated Order PDFs
after the first page.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On Mac OS Sierra, the Deposit Transactions Report would seem to freeze when transferring
deposits to the Deposit Slip.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When adding a non-Consignment item to a Consignment Receiving Record, you are now prompted
to flag the item as a Consignment item and load it.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new SRO "Find" feature called "Old-School Find By Customer...".  This is
basically the old SRO Customer "Keyword" search, brought back by popular demand.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to modify the following fields at a Location on a posted Invoice, and
have that updated information transferred to and updated on the same Invoice at the MAIN:
	REFERENCE#
	SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
	SCREEN NOTES
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function on the Order listing called "E-Mail Selected Orders As PDFs".
******************************************************************************************
The "Dollar Amount Backordered" has been removed from the "Daily Snap-Shot".  This data
was only accurate for those Users who used the backordering system in PIMS.  For those who
didn't, this figure was overinflated.  There are other places to pull this data, so it was
removed from this report.
******************************************************************************************
From the "Listed Clients Window", you can update all connected Clients to your Custom
Splash-Screen.  However, this updates all of the preferences and not just the
Splash-Screen.  We updated this process so (as an option) you can opt to just update the
Splash-Screens on the connected Clients.
******************************************************************************************
You can now refund an SRO Deposit from an SRO that has an associated Invoice with an
Applied Credit.  There are many safeguards, and you will be prompted through the process.
The Invoice (or Salesorder) will have the Applied Credit removed from it.
******************************************************************************************
When a successful GSX "Part Return Update" went through, Apple did not return any messages.
Under these circumstances, PIMS will now display the "G" Code if all is well.
******************************************************************************************
When any "A/R Wash-out" routine is run that deletes a Customer A/R transaction, any 
associated Invoices are now flagged as "PAID".
******************************************************************************************
To change/clear any of the CC Authorization Codes, you now only need to belong to the 
"MANUAL_CC_AUTHORIZATION" Password Group.
******************************************************************************************
The "Return Items" part of "Manipulate Line-Items" on a posted Invoice has been modified,
and works better and is easier to modify.
******************************************************************************************
The Comprehensive SRO Status Report has been updated for better performance and stability
when run remotely.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record, the "Loc On-Hands" page now shows all numbers as left-justified.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record, the "List This Location Only With Stock" is now
"List This Location Only" (whether there's stock or not).
******************************************************************************************
Removed redundant "E-Mail Selected Orders..." from Order Listing "Functions" menu.  Use
pop-menu at bottom of listing instead.  The "...Orders As PDFs" has been moved there as
well.
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By P.O. Number..." menu function will now drop you into a P.O. listing, and not
the P.O. itself.  This will allow you to duplicate it if desired (or just open it).
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, certain functions like Adding a Customer to the system, taking a Deposit,
Sending To Invoice, etc. will now disable the "Cancel" button function.  The SRO was
always saved during these processes anyway, but hitting Cancel under certain circumstances
would mess-up the Parts holding process.
******************************************************************************************
When assigning a "Repaired By..." to a listing of SROs, when finished the listing will now
represent the SROs that were not selected from the original SRO listing.
******************************************************************************************
"Consignment" items are no longer blocked from product Choosers.  This means that the 
"Block From Order Choosers" on the Inventory record is no longer defaulted to "checked"
for Consignment Inventory.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking the "Select" button to manually enter a Serial# on an Order line-item, you
are now given the choice to type them in, Paste them in, or import from a disk file.
******************************************************************************************
This version is compatible with the PIMS Subscription licensing.
******************************************************************************************
When using "Manipulate Line-Items" on a posted Invoice to return an item, if you click
"Cancel" when prompted the item would be flagged as returned anyway.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The default "timeout" for sending an e-mail from within PIMS has been increased from 30
seconds to 60 seconds.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 14.0.4.3/70.0.4.3 06/08/2017 ********************************************************
** This version of PIMS has been updated to SQL 4D engine v14.6.  This means that your
Client apps will need to be updated as well.  PIMS should do this automatically for you
when you first connect to the updated server.  However, this does not always happen for 
Windows PC Clients.  There are too many variables in that operating system to interfere
with this.  In that case, go to our WEB Site and download the Client apps manually.
******************************************************************************************
The new Service/Repair splash-screen now has a "History" function just like the main
splash-screen.  SROs visited, Last SRO Listing, and Last Inventory Listing" are currently
supported.
******************************************************************************************
On and SRO, when you send the SRO to an Order and the Part Code is not transferred, any
associated Serial# is now not transferred as well.
******************************************************************************************
On the standard SRO Chooser, the "Customer" field is now scanned for "Keywords" in the
same manner as the standard Order Chooser.  For the SRO Chooser, only Bill-To Name and
Bill-To Attn. are scanned.
******************************************************************************************
In SRO Preferences, there is now a "REPAIR TYPE Mandatory" checkbox.
******************************************************************************************
The "PayTrace" connection protocols have been updated to match their current security
level.
******************************************************************************************
The "Authorize.net" connection protocols have been updated to match their current security
level.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where the iPhone IEMI# to Serial# translater stopped working after
the 2017 GSX update.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue that caused the new SRO Quote to load slowly on larger systems.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Special "SRO Status" processing for South America developed.
******************************************************************************************
Apple's 2017 GSX update caused duplicate GSX CompTIA codes to be imported.  We filter for
this error and keep duplicates from being imported.
******************************************************************************************
"Fetch Apple GSX Invoices..." has been added to the Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu.
******************************************************************************************
Assignable splash-screen buttons have been added to the Service/Repair Module as well as
EDC Accounting.
******************************************************************************************
When assigning Splash-Screen buttons, you can now assign some of your
"Saved Search Templates" as well.
******************************************************************************************
The Historical A/R and A/P listings now have "Export" buttons.
******************************************************************************************
When transferring a GSX SRO to an Order, the proper "Cost" of "Non-Returnable" wasn't
always copied to the Order.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When double-clicking on the "Assign Button" function listing to run the function, that
dialogbox would get in the way.  It's now hidden when running the function from there.
******************************************************************************************
When switching to the new GSX "Apr/2017", the "ProductLine" was no longer returned.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On rare occasions (very rare), it was possible to select more items that what was in
stock for a specific Sub-Location on an Order.  This loophole has now been closed.
******************************************************************************************
A new option exists in Data-Sync called "SEND QUOTES FROM LOCATION TO MAIN".  If checked
(Location only, not MAIN), then Locations will sync "Quotes" to the MAIN location.  This
is a oneway ride.  The MAIN will not send these or any other Quotes back down to a 
Location.  Keep this in mind when messing with other Location's Quotes at the MAIN.  This
is for reporting purposes at the MAIN only.  If necessary, you can set existing Quotes
prior to this Update as flagged for Data-Sync to send (Locations only).
******************************************************************************************
The "Last RMA" record has been added to the main splash-screen "History" area.
******************************************************************************************
Un-Posting an RMA with a fail, now cancels that RMA (same as clicking Cancel button).
******************************************************************************************
The "Slow Movement Report" now has an "Export" button that will export the items listed
plus last date received, last quantity received, and the Location it was last received at.
Only Posted Receiving Records are scanned, and the Date Posted is used.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function under the "Customer" menu called "REFUND_CUSTOMER_CREDIT".
Once a Customer is selected, this will display a list of "Credits" on that Customer's
A/R Ledger card that ARE NOT "Deposits".  From there, and number of existing credits can
be selected and processed for refund.  "Deposits" should still be refunded from their own
special menu functions.  Please note that if you are refunding Customer credits back to
a creditcard, you can only select one credit at a time that was originally run from a
creditcard.  Also, you can't select a combination of cash/check credits and creditcards.
******************************************************************************************
If you had stock on-hand for a Discontinued item, it was possible to backorder some.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
You can now do partial "Validations" on the Order Picking List Validation.  There's a new
checkbox right above the "ANALYZE - F2" button called "SELECTED ITEMS ONLY".  It will look
for any Order line-items selected (small checkbox below trashcan checked).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu item under the "Validate" menu on the Order entry screen called
"Un-Select Selected Lines".
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record's "Component" listing, there is a new button called
"Swap Part Code".  You can click into a Component line-item's QTY field to select it,
click this new button, and select a different Part Code for it.  This will change the
line-item data to the new Component, but leave the quantity (QTY) and BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
unaltered.
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS is compatible with future Authorize.net and PayTrace TLS v1.2
changes.
******************************************************************************************
Enhancements have been made to the WEB Services Module, as related to API availability.
******************************************************************************************
Now when a Finished Product is loaded to a Workorder, any "MFG Notes From Inventory" will
be displayed at the time of entry.
******************************************************************************************
When trying to refund a line-item on a posted Invoice (by "Manipulate Line-Items") that
has been refunded before, you are now outright blocked from doing this. (even though we
show that it was previously refunded anyway)...
******************************************************************************************
The Current "Version History" and "Available Training Videos" functions under the main
"File" menu have been removed.  Please reference our WEB Site for this information.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Order screen "Load" menu function called "Load From Disk File - PI...".
A custom plug-in must be associated with this function...
******************************************************************************************
For Remote Order Fulfillment, you can no longer pick your own Location.
******************************************************************************************
More "Order History" events have been added to various Order functions to aid in trapping
careless Users...
******************************************************************************************
If "Sub-Location" processing is turned on, then a required Sub-Location must be picked
before a creditcard can be run.  The same is true for a required Serial#. (Invoices only)
******************************************************************************************
It was found to be possible to remove a Customer from an Order after a Deposit was booked.
This has now being trapped for.
******************************************************************************************
When an Order was either e-mailed or saved as a PDF, holding was not being properly
adjusted.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
It was found to be possible to remove a Customer from an SRO after a Deposit was booked.
This has now being trapped for.
******************************************************************************************
Some functions ("View Another...", "Book Deposit...", etc) have been disabled on cascaded
records (open on top of others).
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer refund a Customer Deposit from an SRO when an Invoice exists with an
"Applied Credit" that is not posted first.
******************************************************************************************
When running the "Find SROs That Booked Deposits..." function, the listing screen was
over maximized when displayed.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If your system is set to allow receiving more of a product than you originally purchased,
you are now prompted if that was actually your intent.  If not, the quantity received
is set to whatever was loaded.
******************************************************************************************
The "Marketing Type" field is now available on the POS Terminal screen.
******************************************************************************************
If a User elects NOT to print a Deposit Receipt, then he/she will be notified that the
Deposit went through anyway.  This warning is the only change in that process.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Other Report" in EDC Accounting called "Print Consolidated Billing Invoice"
When run, the User will be prompted for a specific Invoice (must be posted).  The function
will then look at all associated backordered Invoices ("-A", "-B", etc.) and consolidate
all qualified line-items onto a single duplicate of the original Invoice.  Only line-items
with "Extended" dollar amounts will be included.  The "TSO" button is taken into account,
and the dollar amount total of the duplicated Invoice will equal all of the associated
Invoice line-items.  It will also include all Serial and Lot Numbers entered.  The
duplicated Invoice will have all of the same information, plus the other line-items.
However, the Order Number will have "-CON" appended to it.  Once printed, the duplicated
Invoice is not saved.
******************************************************************************************
More control has been placed on "Un-Posting" an Invoice, with additional error trapping.
******************************************************************************************
When manually posting an Invoice (from Entry Screen), PIMS will alert you right away if
the Period belonging to tat Invoice is Closed.  PIMS would let you know later on, but
now it just does it sooner.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer Post Invoices into the future.  This is just bad practise all the way
around...
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By Customer..." SRO menu function now uses the standard Customer Chooser to
select the Customer.
******************************************************************************************
There was a reported problem with the Stock Salesorder Template in Forms Designer.  It
has been reset to make sure it's fine.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO# can now be changed on a new (never saved) SRO.  However, this is still not
recommended or supported.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function called "List Users Who Didn't Quit Gracefully...".  This will
list all Users who did not properly quit their PIMS application.  This could be because
they "force-quit" PIMS, it crashed or lost connection to the server, and/or was shut down
by the PIMS back-up process.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report in the Service/Repair Module called
"Comprehensive SRO Status Report...".  This is the same as the report found under the SRO
listing's "Functions" menu, except that it prompts you for a date range and Location Code.
It will also prompt you if you would like this report to be run locally or remotely on the
server.  For those connecting remotely to the server, this option will dramatically speed
up the process.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO (right below CUSTOMER SYMPTOMS REPORTED) is a button called 
"Send E-Mail To Tech".  If clicked, the User will be prompted for a message to send to the
"Repaired By" Technician.  The message prompt will default to any new text entered into
the "CUSTOMER SYMPTOMS REPORTED" field.
******************************************************************************************
This is a new process in PMS that will allow you to flag specific Order Worksheets as
"Billing Templates".  These special Order types can be used to create an automated Billing
system that will duplicate a selection of these Worksheets, and turn them into Invoices
with current Costs, Date, and Invoice Numbers.  The concept is to create a function that
can be used for monthly billing, with unlimited Order templates (including multiple per
Customer).  To use this function, first create Order Worksheets and check the checkbox
called "BILLING TEMPLATE" on the Additional Info page.  This checkbox is only visible if
the Order type is "Worksheet".  Next to this checkbox is an optional "BILLING GROUP" field.
It exists to make searching for a group of Billing Templates easier.  To run this process,
produce a listing of Billing Templates, select them, and run "Process Billing Templates..."
from the Functions menu.  To make finding these Templates easier, there is a menu function
called "Billing Templates By Group..." under the "Find Orders" section.  Either enter a
desired Billing Group, or leave blank to find them all.  Worksheets by default don't have
any error-trapping when saving.  However, if they are flagged as Billing Templates, then
error-trapping similar to that of an Invoice takes place.  It is limited, so you should not
have any products loaded that take additional processing like AppleCare, required serial
numbers, Gift Cards, etc.  These processes won't be run.  You should not backorder anything
on these Templates as well.  Keep in mind that these Billing Invoices will be generated
without any User intervention, so be carefull what you load on them.
The "Accounts Receivable" Password Group is needed to run this function.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function under the Order listing's "Function" menu called:
"E-Mail Orders From Selected...".  Simply select a group of Orders from this listing, and
this function will loop through them and e-mail them off (as HTML, not PDF).  The
"Subject" used is "Your Business Name Billing Invoice# nnnnnn".  The e-mail's "FROM"
defaults to the system default.  If a "Billing Statement" bypass FROM exists in the system
then it's used instead.  This feature goes well with the above "Process Billing
Templates..." function.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing a Billing Statement from a Customer record, you now get the standard e-mail
prompt window.
******************************************************************************************
When an Order is VOIDed that has associated Workorder items on it, those items are removed
from the Workorder if the Workorder is not "In Progress", or flagged as "Canceled" if it
is.
******************************************************************************************
When you update data on an Inventory item that used in other items, the PRODUCT NAME will
be updated on associated products (Finished Products, Sub-Assemblies, Cost-Assemblies,
etc.) as well as the costing that already takes place.
******************************************************************************************
It is now easier to create a single "Complementary" Gift Card.  Simply select the File
menu function called "Create Complementary Gift Card..." (Giftcard Functions).  Follow
the prompts.  You must belong to the Password Group "COMPLEMENTARY_GIFT_CARD" to use this
function.  The "Cards" menu has a new function called "List Complementary Gift Cards..."
to list all Complementary Gift Cards created.
******************************************************************************************
The "GSX Parts Return" SRO function has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
If a default Tax Jurisdiction is loaded to a Customer record, and that Tax Jurisdiction
no longer exists in the system, it is no longer loaded to an Order when that Customer is
entered on the Order (or updated on the Order).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called "Hide SAVE Button On Foreign Salesorder" ("More").
When checked, a Salesorder can not be saved from a Location that is different from the
one listed on the Salesorder.  The "SAVE" button is made invisible.  This is for those
Users that always click the "Save" button when just viewing an Order.  This could cause
Data-Sync to replace a Salesorder at a Location that being processed.
******************************************************************************************
Right-clicking on the Order's "Print" buttons will now display alternative Forms Designer
templates for that Order type.  Previously, you need to do a "Control-Bypass" to select
another template and it only worked for Invoices.  Right-clicking now supports ALL
Order types.
******************************************************************************************
On the Product Availability Calculators, the "Cost" at the top was based on Book-Cost.
It's now based on Order Line-Item Cost from the Inventory record.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when a "Kit" was loaded to an Order as the first item, then another Kit
was loaded to that same Order, and then the Price was changed on the second Kit line-item.
This would in rare cases cause the Price of the first Kit to change as well.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO entry screen, running either of the two "Estimate" functions would cause the
"Billed" checkbox to automatically be checked and would "un-hold" any Parts on the SRO
that were being held at the time.  At the same time, if the current SRO "Status" had been
changed prior to running either of these functions, the new SRO Status e-mail was not
sent.  These have been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, if the "Status" was changed and then the SRO was sent to an Invoice, the new
SRO Status was not e-mailed.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Now on an SRO, everything the "Status" is changed it's logged in the SRO History log.
******************************************************************************************
When un-posting an Invoice with Multiple A/Y Payment Types present, only the first 
Payment Type would "Wash".  The others would simply create a negative A/R entry on the
Customer Ledger Card to offset the original transaction.  This has been fixed to that all
three Payment fields act the same now (wash-out original).  It should be noted that if
any payments have been made again any posted transactions, PIMS will enter a reversed
credit amount for the original entry and not wash it out.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "QUOTE_DISALLOW_SALE".  This allows a User to
create either an Order "Quote" or "Worksheet" for a Customer flagged as
"DISALLOW SALE".  Once an Order is created for this type of Customer under these
conditions, it can't be turned into a Salesorder or Invoice.  The existing Password Group
called "OVERRIDE_DISALLOW_SALE" is unchanged and will bypass this new function and allow
any Order type to be created.
******************************************************************************************
A User must now belong to the Password Group "TOTAL_ACCESS" to change the Server Location
Code in PIMS Preferences.  This keeps other Users from mistakenly changing it by mistake.
******************************************************************************************
When a PIMS Client of one Location ties into a PIMS Server of another Location, the User
is altered to this fact but may continue.
******************************************************************************************
With Cayan creditcard processing, an AMEX EMV (chip) transaction will no longer print the
expiration date.  This follows new 2017 AMEX guidelines...
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating an Order, the "BYPASS CREDIT LIMIT" option was duplicated as well.  It
is now cleared on the duplicated Order.
******************************************************************************************
The Employee record now has a TERMINATED checkbox and associated Date field.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new "Other Reports (Sales)":  "Category Sales Report By Department" and 
"Product Sales Report By Department".
******************************************************************************************
The SRO listing now has additional sort buttons up top.  If a column header is underlined,
then clicking it will sort the column.
******************************************************************************************
The "List SROs With Backorders" function will no longer list SROs with backordered GSX
Parts (if that's all that's on there).
******************************************************************************************
The "Specific Customer Monthly Product Purchases (Units)" report has been renamed
"Specific Customer Monthly Product Shipped (Units)".
******************************************************************************************
The "Specific Customer Monthly Product Purchases (Dollars)" report has been renamed
"Specific Customer Monthly Product Shipped (Dollars)", and is based on "Shipped x Price"
and no longer "Shipped x Cost".  A new report called "Specific Customer Monthly Product 
Cost Shipped (Dollars)" now takes the place of the original "Specific Customer Monthly 
Product Shipped (Dollars)" report.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new field on the SRO entry screen called "SRO REPAIR TYPE".  Clicking on the
text field label "SRO REPAIR TYPE" will display a User configurable listing to choose
from.  This default listing can be configured from the new SRO PREFERENCES' "Repair Types"
TAB.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO listing, holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the column header "Sort"
buttons will sort in the opposite direction.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO Parts listing, if you add a GSX "Loaner" item that does not exist in your
system, then when PIMS now adds it to your system all "Costs" are zero.
******************************************************************************************
If a Customer product was under both "Limited" and "Contracted" warranty coverage, then
PIMS would only flag the SRO as the "Limited" warranty and not the "Extended".  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When performing an "Update Parts Return" GSX function on an SRO, if either "GPR" or "DOA"
Parts exist, the associated Inventory record(s) will be adjusted (their ON-HANDs).
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, if a Part is flagged as GSX GPR then it is not copied over to the Order when
creating one.  This is because it was not needed and therefor should not be billed to the
Customer.
******************************************************************************************
Deleting an item off of an Order that has a "Status" greater than "2" (Allocated/Received)
while under an "Upper-Level Override" is now logged in the Odd-Things file and Access Log.
******************************************************************************************
A new field called ŇGSX APPLE ID:Ó has been added to the Employee record, for those with
the ŇApple DealerÓ function active.  If an Technician has an override on their Employee
record, then PIMS will use that Apple ID when authenticating a connection with GSX and not
the default one from GSX Preferences for that Location.
******************************************************************************************
A new function has been added to the Service/Repair Module's "SRO" menu called
"Create SRO Quote Only...".  When selected, a new SRO is created and defaulted to an SRO
"Quote".  The difference here is that no SRO# is assigned yet.  Clicking the "Cancel"
button will not waste an SRO#.  However, if you Save, Print, E-Mail, or print "Estimate",
an SRO# will automatically be assigned.  This is important because the a reference is
necessary at that point.
******************************************************************************************
On the standard SEARCH EDITOR, you can now sort the stored search templates by clicking
on the template listing header.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, when you select "View Another SRO" you are provided the standard SRO Chooser
and not just prompted for an SRO#.
******************************************************************************************
When a Category record had override G/L accounts present and the "Priority" checkbox was
checked, those accounts took priority over any other accounts.  However, this only worked
for the "MAIN" Location on a multi-Location system.  This has been fixed so that any
Category Location overrides will take priority if they exist.
******************************************************************************************
If "Marketing Type Mandatory" is set in PIMS Preferences, then the POS Terminal entry
screen will default the Marketing field to "POS Terminal".  This will keep the error
message for a blank Marketing field from displaying on the POS Terminal entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
There were "mouse-clicks" issues with some Mac operating systems and the "Close A Period"
dialogbox.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************

Apple GSX "Apr/2017" Changes (Apple Resellers Only):

This version is compatible with Apple's "April 2017" GSX update...
******************************************************************************************
The Service Module "Splash-Screen" has been redesigned and now has the same ability to
assign screen buttons as the Main PIMS splash-screen.
******************************************************************************************
When performing a "Warranty Status" check on an Apple SRO, more information is displayed.
******************************************************************************************
On an Apple SRO, you can now click on the Equipment line's "Available Repair Strategies"
text to display it in it's own window.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on the Apple SRO's Parts entry screen called "Don't Replace With
Consignment".  This is only relevant if this is a "Consignment" SRO and you do not wish
the item in question to be replaced with Consignment stock.  This is used in the GSX call
"Update Repair Or Replace".
******************************************************************************************
On an Apple SRO, the GSX "Return Loaner" call now has an additional option called
"Return Loaner - Display Damaged".
******************************************************************************************
On an Apple SRO, the GSX "Return Loaner" "Device Is Restored" has been removed.
******************************************************************************************
On an Apple SRO, "Loaners" are no longer transferred to the Order.
******************************************************************************************
A new checkbox on the SRO Parts entry screen called "DON'T TRANSFER TO ORDER" now exists.
If checked, that Part will not be transferred to an Order when one is created from that
SRO.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, the Customer Name (BNAME) and SRO# now appear on every page in roughly the
same place.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO entry screen, the Parts "Description" field now has the same "Keyword" search
function as the Order line-item.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new SRO report called "Warranty Parts Received, Not Completed Export...".  When
run, it will look for all SROs that are not "Completed", and have at least one "Warranty"
Part received back from Apple.  Presumably, these Parts should NOT be counted in your
Service Parts cycle counts.  This list is exported and can be used for reference when
doing your Service Parts Inventory Reconciliations.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 14.0.4.2/70.0.4.2 07/23/2016 ********************************************************
The "Update CompTIA" function in GSX has been updated, after Apple's last-minute change.
******************************************************************************************
The Purchase Order's "P.O. To GSX" function in GSX has been updated, after Apple's
last-minute change.
******************************************************************************************
The "GSX Coverage Options" for RoR repairs has been updated, due to last-minute changes
by Apple.  This includes the addition of "Display Only Service".
******************************************************************************************
The CED "Signature Capture" function on the SRO has been rewritten, and functions more
like the it does on the Order (with Cancel button).
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory record now has an "END-OF-LIFE" field available.
******************************************************************************************
A fix has been applied that will allow you to send bulk "Status" e-mails from SROs, even
if the "DISABLE SENDING SRO E-MAILS" is checked in Service Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
The "Save/Keep Open" button has been removed from the SRO entry screen.  It didn't really
serve any great importance.
******************************************************************************************
A new function has been added to the Import/Export Module called
"Import Starting ON-HANDS..." ("->Import" menu).  This will allow you to enter a starting
"ON-HAND" for given Inventory record Locations.  The format is as follows:
	LOCATION CODE
	PART CODE
	DESCRIPTION (optional or blank)
	STARTING BALANCE
	STARTING DATE (optional)
If the "STARTING DATE" is blank or missing, the creation date of that Inventory record
will be used.
******************************************************************************************
THE "Trace Part Code..." function now takes the "Starting ON-HANDS" into consideration.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory record's "Loc On-Hands" sublisting, double-clicking a line-item will now
display all of the fields (including internal) for that Location listed.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory record, the "List All Locations With Activity" button will now list a
Location where only the ON-ORDER has a figure in it.
******************************************************************************************
The GSX RoR function now takes Loaners (or the lack of) into account.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the Orders "BATTN" field not doing it's keyword search properly.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If an Order line-item is deleted after a Sub-Location has been assigned, a log of this
deletion is now kept in the Order's "Order History".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Widget called "Products Availability...".  It's the same as the
original "Product Availability...", except that it lets you search and list more than just
a single product.
******************************************************************************************
On the GSX "Repair Or Replace" and "Update Repair/Replace" functions, Loaner devices were
being listed twice.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new optional function in the Service/Repair Module called "View Remote SRO...".
If you have the PIMS WEB Services Module and 4D WEB Server license, you can use this
function from a remote Location to view (not modify) and SRO.  This SRO is pulled from the
MAIN Location.
******************************************************************************************
You can now double-click on the green "Expand" button on the Backorders line-item on the
Product Purchase Worksheet to view that Order.  You can view the Order, but really
shouldn't modify it any any way.  If you do modify it in a way that will alter the Product
Purchase Worksheet you're currently viewing, then you should have PIMS update it when
prompted (after closing the Order screen).  If not, decline the updating.  Keep in mind
that the line-item you double-clicked on will be locked anyway, and you can't modify it
on the Order you're viewing.
******************************************************************************************
The button on the Order entry screen to print "Page 1" has been moved to a menu item
under the "Functions" menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on page 1 of the Order entry screen called "DROP-SHIP TO CUSTOMER".
If checked, that Order's backordered items will not be included on the Product Purchase
Worksheet or the "Orders With Backorder Needs..." menu function.  Instead, you pull the
new "Orders With Drop-Ship Needs..." functions ("Orders" menu).  This will produce a
listing of all Orders that have backorder needs that are flagged as
"DROP-SHIP TO CUSTOMER".  This allows you to open each one, review it, and send it to an
isolated drop-ship Purchase Order.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Service/Repair Module called "GSX Repairs Lookup...".  It's
under the GSX menu, and ties into GSX and fetches repairs based on the Date Range you
provide.
******************************************************************************************
The "Rental Inventory Listing" (Rental Module) now shows "AVAIL" (currently available)
and not "QTY" (total ON-HAND).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new listing in the Rental Module's Inventory menu called 
"List All Rental Status...".
******************************************************************************************
The "Trace Part Code..." function did not account for the SRO's "Held" amount in the 
"Going Out" column (even though it showed Held).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory Reconciliation screen now requires a valid Employee Code be entered.
******************************************************************************************
On the Purchase Order entry screen, the "Force As Reconciled" checkbox now keeps that
Purchase Order off of the "Inventory Holding Report".
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where the backordered SRO items did not have their "Held" quantities
adjusted when received.  They would only update when the SRO was opened/saved.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The function that reverses an Inventory Transfer has been rewritten from scratch, and
there have been bug fixes along the way.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, clicking the underlined "ESTIMATED COST:" button will now calculate the
pricing of the SRO as though it were sent to an Order (like printing the Estimate).
******************************************************************************************
Additional trapping has been added to the SRO Signature Capture and CED Agreement
functions.
******************************************************************************************
The "Trace Part Code..." function was malfunctioning with respect to the "Odd Things"
listings.  The totals at the footer were accurate, but some line-items were missing off
of the listing.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when unposting an Invoice, more than once, that had an "Applied Credit"
on it.  If you posted, unposted, reposted, unposted, reposted, etc., then you would find
a copy of the customer credit transaction duplicated more than once on the associated
Customer's A/R Ledger.  This did not occur if you simply unposted/reposted the Invoice
once.  Regular A/R Payment Types were not affected.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When un-posting an Invoice with a creditcard transaction(s) run, you are now prompted as
whether or not to reverse the creditcards present on that Invoice.  Prior to this update,
they were automatically reversed.
******************************************************************************************
For the GSX "GSX Repairs Lookup..." function, you are now prompted for a "Repair Status"
and "Repair Type" to narrow your selection at GSX.  You have the option of selecting "ALL"
if you would like all repairs listed.
******************************************************************************************
For the GSX "GSX Repairs Lookup..." function, the "SHIP-TO" and not the "SOLD-TO" is
used in the search criteria.
******************************************************************************************
The dialogbox to select a "Bank" has been changed.  It now displays the Bank Name, Acct#,
and current balance.
******************************************************************************************
The "Funds Transfer" function has a new Chooser screen.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Other Reports" (Customer) called "Payment Trend Report By Customer".
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to use the "Order Fulfillment" function to fetch a remote Salesorder,
fulfill it, turn it into an Invoice, process a creditcard, and return it to the originating
Location.  This would happen if the Customer starts the Order in one Location, but then
goes to another Location to pay for it and pick it up... 
******************************************************************************************
The "Sales By The Hour" and "Returns By The Hour" did not print properly.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If you manually enter an "IN" Location Code on an Inventory Transfer and do not use the
little blue down-arrow, then you will now be prompted for a "FROM" Location Code.
******************************************************************************************
This version is compatible with the on-line Customer Payment WEB Portal plug-in.
A separate license is required, however.
******************************************************************************************
The name of the Windows PC 64-Bit PIMS Server has been changed from "PIMS-Gold 64" to
just "PIMS-Gold".  This make automatic updates to Mac Clients tied into the 64-Bit server
easier.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 14.0.4.1/70.0.4.1 05/12/2016 ********************************************************
This version of PIMS is compatible with Apple's "May 15th 2016" GSX update...
******************************************************************************************
There was a field formatting error on the Inventory record's CTO link field.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Fixed problem where SRO data could revert back to previous version after sending SRO to
Order.
******************************************************************************************
Fixed problem where Purchase Order total listed on Purchase Order listing did not reflect
the actual Total on a specific Purchase Order entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
A field called "vSignatureImage" on very old PIMS Order templates would cause the Order
printing process to crash if it was present.  This has been fixed.
** This field is no longer used, and should be removed from your templates anyway...
******************************************************************************************
"GSX Developer Test Mode" engine installed and available for qualified Users.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to select multiple Deposits/Credits to "Apply" to an Invoice.
******************************************************************************************
The Order's "Apply Credit" button is now only available for Invoices, and not other Order
types.
******************************************************************************************
When applying a Deposit/Credit to an Order, the "Apply All, Minus Pending" has been
removed.  It has been replaced with the "Apply Selected" button.
******************************************************************************************
As long as Deposit is applied to an Invoice (or multiple), any unused balance can be
refunded on the spot.  However, if the Deposit is a simple credit with no Deposit
associated with is (no Receipt Journal), then refunding any difference is not supported
from that function.  This is because it's a different accounting function.
******************************************************************************************
The "Apply Credit" button on the Invoice will now display the credit available dollar
amount as a "Tool Tip" when you hold the cursor over that button.
******************************************************************************************
The way that A/R and Customer Deposits are "washed-out" has been enhanced.  There are two
new settings in EDC Accounting Settings called:
	Wash-Out All Apposing A/R Balances
	Wash-Out Customers With Zero Balance
Normally PIMS will adjust and/or delete a Customer's opposite A/R transaction on their
Customer Ledger Card based on the fact that they share the same Reference#.  However, if
the "Wash-Out All Apposing A/R Balances" button is checked in Settings, PIMS will simply
look for opposite dollar amounts that equal and delete (wash-out) those transactions
regardless of their Reference numbers.  The "Wash-Out Customers With Zero Balance" option
will delete ALL Customer A/R Ledger activity if the total net amount due is zero.
These settings are used in the Nightly Processes, the "Wash-Out" function on the Customer
record entry screen, and the new function called "Wash-Out Opposing Transactions..."
found under the EDC Accounting "A/R" menu.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now handles the refunding of unused Customer Deposits on an Order better, and is
better adapted for Data-Sync.
******************************************************************************************
When manually placing backordered items from a Salesorder to an isolated Purchase Order
with a designated overriding Vendor, PIMS would display an incomplete P.O. total on the
associated P.O. listing.  This was cosmetic only, and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new preference in EDC Accounting "Accounting Preferences called 
"Zero Credit Limit Means No Credit Available".  If checked, PIMS will now consider the
Credit Limit of zero on a Customer record as no credit available.  By default, PIMS
considers a zero Credit Limit as "unlimited".  Setting this flag will cause the opposite
to be the case.  There is also an additional Plug-In tie for controlling custom credit
availability needs...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "OVERRIDE_DISALLOW_SALE" that will allow a User to
load a Customer to an Order that is flagged as "DISALLOW SALE".
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the new "Actual Deposit Amount" feature and printing a Deposit
Slip that contained "Cash Back".  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The RMA record now contains a standard "History" field (RMA History).
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.4.0/70.0.4.0 04/27/2016 ********************************************************
** This version of PIMS has been updated to SQL 4D engine v14.5.  This means that your
Client apps will need to be updated as well.  PIMS should do this automatically for you
when you first connect to the updated server.  However, this does not always happen for 
Windows PC Clients.  There are too many variables in that operating system to interfere
with this.  In that case, here are the links to download and manually replace the Client
apps:

	http://www.industrialbitworks.com/PIMS-SQL_DOWNLOAD/PIMS-Gold_Client_Mac.zip
	http://www.industrialbitworks.com/PIMS-SQL_DOWNLOAD/PIMS-Gold_Client_Win.zip
	
	PLEASE NOTE:  If you have Mac PIMS Clients connecting to a Windows 64-Bit version of
	PIMS, you will need to download the current PIMS Client app instead of letting PIMS
	update it for you.  This is because the Mac PIMS Client app is signed by Apple, and
	the 64-Bit Windows Server will change the name of the Client app and make it invalid
	as far as the Mac O/S is concerned.  Downloading and manually updating the Mac Client
	app in this case is fine.
******************************************************************************************
** The "Sub-Location" functions are generally not referenced in the Version
History, as they exist outside of normal PIMS operations...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Purchasing report in PIMS called
"Comprehensive Purchase Order Report By Date".
This report will prompt you for a data range and then scan all "Processed"
Purchase Orders for that date range and compile an export for you.  This export
shows quantity ordered, received, and paid for a summation of products found on
those Purchase Orders.  This report is found in "Order Reports" and can also be
found under the P.O. menu as "Comprehensive P.O. Report By Date...".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report under the "Reports" menu called
"Summarized Inventory Value Report...".  This is a more advanced screen report
that will show you the inventoried value of the stock you have in every
Location.  Double-clicking on a Location will show you the detail of ever
accumulated item that makes up those values for the Location selected.  The
"Inventoried" figure is equal to the ON-HAND, HELD, and IN-TRANSIT figures
added together for each Product.  If that figure is negative, then it is set to
zero.  You can scroll to the right on the "Detailed" listing to see additional
Product fields.  In the Detail you can also see the last time that Product was
adjusted by either an Inventory Reconciliation or manually from the Inventory
entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
When an Inventory Transfer and/or a Receiving Record fails to re-post at the
MAIN during a Data-Sync session, the process will now keep trying to post them
until it succeeds.
******************************************************************************************
Various "Choosers" in PIMS that deal with "Name" have been enhanced to perform
better "Keyword" searches.  The previous PIMS version was an improvement, but
it needed more work!
******************************************************************************************
There's a new menu item under the Inventory Listing's "Function" menu called
"Summarized Selected Values...".  When selected, it will run the report called
"Summarized Inventory Value Report...", except it will run it with only the
records selected.  This replaces "Selected Stats...".
******************************************************************************************
There's a new function on the Inventory Listing called
"Export All Locations Fields...".  When run, it will export all of the "Location
On-Hands" fields for those records selected.
******************************************************************************************
There were issues when saving a modified COA record, where it though it was a
duplicate.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The various record "Choosers" in PIMS were ignoring the "-" character in their
"Keyword" searches.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When running the function called "Place Backorders On P.O.s..." on an Order to
drop-ship product, the prompt will now ask if you'd like to send all backordered
products to a single Vendor regardless of what's listed on the associated
Inventory records".  The field tital is "Send All To This Vendor:".  Clicking on
hat text will display the general Vendor Chooser.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Rental Module's "Agreements" menu called
"List All OPEN Items...".  This will list all "Open" (not returned yet) items.
******************************************************************************************
When changing the Vendor Code on an existing Purchase Order, PIMS will now scan
for "Alternant Vendors" and adjust the line-item costs as needed.
******************************************************************************************
The Employee Code entry field on the Purchase Order entry screen has been moved
to the upper left-hand side of the screen to be more compatible with other
screens in PIMS.  Please note that this field is now first in the TAB sequence.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now has extended error messaging for GSX, when Apple actually doesn't return
and error but one exists.
******************************************************************************************
On the standard PIMS "Date Chooser", changing the Month and/or year will no
longer reset the Date range to zero.
******************************************************************************************
The "Negative On-Hands For Specific Location" report has been modified to show
all Inventory records in which the ON-HAND figure is less than zero.  Previously
it would combine ON-HAND plus HOLDING to arrive at that number.
******************************************************************************************
The "Export Accumulated Differences" function at the bottom of the Inventory
Reconciliation listing now adds an extended dollar amount that equals the
"Difference" multiplied by the Weighted Cost.  There is also now an option to
isolate these differences to just those items listed.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory Reconciliation done at a Location and not the MAIN, you can only
"Clear ON-HANDs" and "Update ON-HANDs" once.  This is because the MAIN will
process these when they are received.  The MAIN on the other hand can run both
these function more than once, even though this should be done with caution.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory entry screen, you can now add a Vendor and MFG to the system
by clicking the field titles next to each field.
******************************************************************************************
As of this version, by default you can no longer open either a Salesorder or
Invoice and change it to a Quote and/or Worksheet.  This type of downgrading is
now only available if the User belongs to the new "DOWNGRADE_BELOW_SALESORDER"
Password Group.  By default, only the Administrator and "TOTAL_ACCESS" Group
allows for this.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "CAN'T_RUN_ORDER_PREAUTHS".  Any User
belonging to this Group can not process a credit card Pre-Authorization on
Salesorders.
******************************************************************************************
You can now load a "Finance Company" on a Purchase Journal entry screen, just
like on a Purchase Order.  If a Finance Company is associated with a Vendor being
loaded onto a Purchase Journal, then that Finance Company is used when posting
that Purchase Journal.  A Finance Company can be loaded manually by clicking on
the field title called "Financed By:".  This can also be used to clear the
existing Finance Company.
******************************************************************************************
A new field on the SRO is now automatically populated with the GSX Repair Type",
when an SRO is uploaded to GSX.  The field name is "GSX_REPAIR_TYPE" and can be
viewed under the "GSX CONFIRMATION" field.  PLEASE NOTE that this field will
only be populated from this point on.
There is a new function under the "S.R.O." menu ("List GSX SROs") called
"Find By GSX Repair Type...".
******************************************************************************************
The SRO now has a "PRODUCT LINE" field that is populated with the "ProductLine"
returned by GSX when the Warranty Status is first checked.  This exists for
reporting functions, etc.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report that can be run on a selection of SROs called
"Comprehensive SRO Status Report...".  It can be found under the SRO listing's
"Function" menu.
******************************************************************************************
The Check Register now sorts by Check Date and not Entry Date, in decending
order (as before).
******************************************************************************************
On a Backordered Salesorder, the "Sub-Location" pulled from and the number
picked were not reset.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
You can now add a "Vendor" to the system directly from the Check entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
Various record "Choosers" have had their "Name" fields modified for better and
more consistant "Keyword" searching.  The same is true for "Name" fields on both
Orders and SROs.
******************************************************************************************
Bringing Order line-items "Current" (Functions menu) will now update additional
flags set from the Inventory record.
******************************************************************************************
There are even more messages returned and processed from Apple's GSX system.
******************************************************************************************
THE "totalFromOrder" GSX information is now displayed in the GSX Confirmation
dialog window, at the end of any GSX message returned.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "List Checks By Vendor..." function under the "Checking" menu in
EDC Accounting Module.
******************************************************************************************
There was a series of events concerning the over payment of a Vendor check,
using that vendor credit to pay a future check to that Vendor, and then going
back and voiding the original check that had the over payment.  The accounting
was accurate, but the original A/P over payment didn't make it back to the
Vendor ledger card.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
When using "Manipulate Line-Items" on an Order entry screen, the Sub-Location
and Quantity Picked are now cleared on Refunded and Duplicated line-items.
******************************************************************************************
THE "Inventory List For Specific Location..." function (Reports menu) will now
only display items that have figures in any of the fields listed.  If they are
all blank, the item is not listed.  The standard "Available" field has also
been added as a column to the report.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new default option in EDC Accounting Preferences called
"Don't Print Payments Made On Statements".  If checked, printed/e-mailed
Statements will not include any "Payments Made".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the pop-menu called "Print/E-Mail Options", at the 
bottom of an Order listing called "Send Selected "BCC" To E-Mail Program".  When
selected, this function will send all valid e-mail addresses from an Order
selection (BEMAIL) to the ŇBCCÓ field on their default e-mail Browser program.
The ŇTOÓ will be set to the default ŇFROMÓ address in their PIMS Settings.
******************************************************************************************
Now when un-posting a posted Invoice, PIMS will remove the original Customer
A/R transaction from the associated Customer A/R Ledger card if the Payment
Type is accounts receivable.  Previous to this version, PIMS would simply
make a negative transaction entry on the A/R Ledger card to offset the original.
******************************************************************************************
The "A/R Wash-out" function of the PIMS "Nightly Processes" has been rewritten
to scan the Customer records for A/R transactions that have an exact opposite
transaction listed on the Customer A/R Ledger card.  Only matching REFNO and
opposite BALANCEDUE transactions are consolidated and removed.  Accounting G/L
figures remain the same as does the overall Customer Balance Due.
******************************************************************************************
When bulk updating SRO Statuses from an SRO listing, you can no longer select
a blank Status.  You may also click or double-click to select a Status to apply.
******************************************************************************************
SROs now have the ability to be "SRO Quotes".  There is a new "QUOTE" checkbox
just to the left of the SRO# on the front page of the SRO entry screen.  If
checked, certain functions and error-trapping are removed.  The SRO Quotes are
also removed from many reports and listings where they don't belong.  Un-checking
this checkbox will bring error-trapping and other functions back on-line for that
SRO.  Turning the Quote button off will also reset the SRO Date/Time to the
current date/time.  Under the SROs menu, there is a new "List SRO Quotes..."
function and the SRO listing's Selection pop-menu has a new function to filter
SRO Quotes out of any displayed listing of SROs ("Filter-Out SRO Quotes").
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Deposit Slip entry screen called
"Set Actual Deposit Amount".  When clicked, you will be prompted for a dollar
amount that is less than the total of the line-items listed as well as a Chart-
Of-Account# to book this difference again.  The primary reason for this is for
creditcard deposits where the actual amount being physically deposited is less
than the offsetting Cash Drawer amount.  This makes it much easier to clear the
monies in the Cash Drawer and automatically book things like "Bank Charges" to
offset the difference.  To clear this bypass total, click the button, enter zero,
and then click "Cancel" when prompted for a G/L account.
******************************************************************************************
In the Cayan section of PIMS Preferences, their is a new optional
"CED Signature Areas" part to the SIGNATURE OPTIONS.  As some Cayan CEDs are 
different than others (rare), this section will allow you to finetune your CED
Signature Capture boundaries rectangle.  There is one for SROs and one for Ordes.
This would only be used if the Signature looks like it is "off the page" or
otherwise misaligned.  This should be used with caution.  Setting these fields
to zero and saving will set them back to their defaulted sizes.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue created by Sub-Location processing for those who do not do
Sub-Location processing that made it difficult to Transfer products into a 
Location by themselves (no Transfer "out" associated).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to "Hold" non-GSX Parts on an SRO.  At the same time, non-GSX
Parts can be "Backordered" on SROs as well.  Please refer to a Tech Note on this
for more information.  Also note that these two functions ARE NOT available when
"Sub-Location" processing is activated.
******************************************************************************************
The "Auto-Load" function is once again available on SROs.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function called "List SROs With Backorder Needs..." in the
Service/Repair Module.  SRO Backorder processing must first be enabled in the
system.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new GSX function called "Flag SRO In GSX As 'Ready For Pickup'",
available on an SRO.  This feature is similar to the "SRO/GSX Update" command,
but is a single call with no additional parameters to fill out.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new SRO Settings option called
"AUTOMATICALLY FLAG 'READY FOR PICKUP' ON COMPLETION".  When activated, PIMS will
send GSX a "Ready For Pickup" API call when the SRO completion date is entered.
There is also a new "READY FOR PICKUP" checkbox on the SRO that is checked
automatically if the GSX call is successful.  If checked, the call can not be
made again to GSX (until the checkbox is unchecked).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS Preferences ("More", Options-3) called
"Allow Partial Deposit Refunding After Applied Credit".  If activated, every time
a partial Customer credit is applied to an Order (not the full amount), PIMS will
prompt you to refund the difference on the spot.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in EDC Accounting Settings called
"Wash-Out All Apposing A/R Balances".  If activated, PIMS will not look for matching
Reference numbers when deleting "opposite" A/R transactions.  Basically, if there
is an A/R balance on a Customer record and an exact opposite (negative) amount
exists as well, both transactions will be washed-out (deleted).  When this
function is not activated, then the Reference numbers must match as well to be
washed-out (the default).  This is helpful with those running Data-Sync.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function on the Customer record's "Accounting" menu called
"Wash-Out A\R Balances...".  It follows the "Wash-out Apposing A/R Balances"
rules in EDC Accounting Settings", if set.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO, the GSX "Parts Return Update" function has been rewritten and
brought current.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory record now has a second Sub-Category field called "Sub-Group".
This field acts just like the "Sub-Category" field.  It can be globally assigned
from the Inventory Listing's "Assign Sub-Groups..." function.  If you are entering
these for the first time on an existing PIMS system, you can run the 
"Update All Order Line-Item's Links..." function
(Import/Export Module - Maintenance) to update existing Orders in your system
with the new Sub-Groups you entered on the associated Inventory records.  On
posted Invoices, this will also build the Sales Histories for the new Sub-Groups.
The "Summarized Sales Report..." now reflects "Sub-Groups" on Invoices.
******************************************************************************************
When loading "Pending Deposits" on a Deposit Slip and then canceling the Deposit
Slip, the next time the Pending Deposits were listed the Order Date was not
listed.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When printing either an Order, Purchase Order, or SRO as a PDF through the
operating systems print driver, the "Print Spooler" name is properly set to that
document's name (ie: "Invoice - 1234.pdf").
******************************************************************************************
There is a new optional field in the "SMTP MAIL-SERVER OUT" area of PIMS
Preferences called "AUTO-BCC ADDRESS FOR ALL E-MAILS".  If you enter a valid
e-mail address there, PIMS will automatically "BCC" (send a copy) to that
address every time PIMS e-mails something from the system.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when printing/e-mailing Customer Statements with attached
PDFs of the associated Orders directly from the Customer record.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new field on the GSX Location Settings called "APPLE GDV LOCATION ID".
This field will be used for future Apple GDV Report plug-ins...
******************************************************************************************
If you tried to import "Stock Templates" in Forms Designer after modifying one
where you changed the name, PIMS will yield up a "Duplicated Key" error.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue when certain windows were displayed in a particular order
during certain processes that caused PIMS to redraw an incomplete menu bar.  To
the best of our knowledge, this has been addressed.  It only happened on certain
Macintosh systems...
******************************************************************************************
The USPS link in PIMS Preferences for contacting the USPS to sign up for the
USPS WEB Services API has been updated to their new site
("https://registration.shippingapis.com/").
******************************************************************************************
The "Quick Loader" on the POS Terminal screen would only accumulate QTY of the
same item if the Part Code was being scanned.  Scanning the Barcode would not
accumulate the QTY and would enter every scan as a new line.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The Preference called "Always Scan 'Starts With' Code On Order" is obsolete, and
has been removed from the program (defaults to un-checked now).
******************************************************************************************
On some entry screens, entering enough line-items to a sub-list to bring it to
the bottom of the display would cause the lines above to temporarily go invisible
when a new line was entered at the bottom.  This has been fixed on all reported.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "Reports" menu called
"Payment Transactions Report...".  This report will prompt for a date range and
then list every Payment Transaction made in the system within that date range.
This includes no less than:

	Invoiced Sales/Refunds
	Order Deposits/Refunds
	SRO Deposits/Refunds
	Post-Authorization Captures
	Payments To Account
	
Pre-Authorizations on Salesorders (creditcard) are not included, as they have
nothing to do with accounting until they are "Captured".  The listing is divided
and color-coded by A/R, Cash/Check/other, and Creditcard transactions.  This
information can be totaled (by selected), exported, and sent to a Deposit Slip.
As a matter of fact, you should use this report to send various deposits to
Deposit Slips (like one for "cash/checks", and one for "creditcards") and no
longer rely on the "Pending Deposits" button on the Deposit Slip (no obsolete).
Because this is obsolete, PIMS will prompt you as whether or not to delete
Pending Deposits when you create Deposits from this report.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Serial Number record entry screen called
"Trace Throughout System".  If clicked, that Serial# will be located everywhere
in the system and displayed (every record it's found on).  There is also a 
separate menu item for this function called "Trace Serial Number...".
******************************************************************************************
Apple's March 21st OSX update to Safari and other internal WEB engines caused
the Cayan WEB Portal to become unresponsive when running Yosemite 10.10.5.  It 
worked fine on El Capitan.  This has been compensated for and fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "Inventory" menu called "Trace Part Code".
When run, you will be prompted for a Location and Part Code.  PIMS will then scan
records in the Datafile that contain this Part Code.  The various "In's and Out's"
on the Inventory change will be recorded and displayed.  No "Date Range" is
involved, and all dates are scanned.
******************************************************************************************
There were issues uploading SROs to GSX where the Customer's Machine Password
contained an ampersand ("&") character.  GSX would return an "Invalid Request"
error.  We have compensated for this and it now works fine.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the "G/L" menu in EDC Accounting called
"Export Manual G/L Alterations...".  When run, PIMS will export any G/L Periods
(Buckets) that have been manually altered in some way outside of PIMS' normal
accounting functions.
******************************************************************************************
The "Items HELD Report" now allows you to view associated SROs when
double-clicking on a line-item on the report.
******************************************************************************************
The "SP" Code on the Order listing has been left-justified and is now two rows
deep (for Employee Codes that are too long).
******************************************************************************************
The partial refunding of SRO Deposits from an Order has been rewritten, and a few
potencial errors have been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There were occasions when a Customer's A/R Ledger entries could offset just right
to keep the "Apply Credit" button to not display on the Order entry screen.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Any area in PIMS that displays WEB pages has been updated (Mac only) to Apple's
v9.1 WEB engine for better compatibility.
******************************************************************************************
You can now grab the standard PIMS large text display window and drag it's height to 
display more information without scrolling.
******************************************************************************************
The GSX "orderReturnNumber" is now sent with the "Parts Return Update" GSX API call.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Inventory entry screen ("Loc On-Hands") called
"List All Locations With Activity".  When clicked, it will list just those Locations that
have any ON-HAND, HELD, or IN TRANSIT that are not equal to zero.
******************************************************************************************
The "RETURN ORDER NUMBER" field on the SRO Parts line-item entry screen has been renamed
"RETURN SHIPPING#" (which is really what it is).  A new field called "RETURN ORDER#" has
been added as well.  The "RETURN ORDER#" is used in the GSX "Parts Return Update" API
call.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing PDF Orders (and SRO Estimates), you can now preview them just like you
could preview the HTML versions.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory entry screen's "Loc On-Hands" page, clicking on the "ON-HAND" column
header will sort that column.  It will sort largest to smallest.
******************************************************************************************
A PDF version of a printed SRO with a "Status Signature" will now be saved even if the
SRO is not actually printed.  A Valid signature must be provided through the associated
CED.
******************************************************************************************
When uploading to GSX, PIMS now scans for any rogue control characters in any data you
might have imported into PIMS (that's part of the upload).
******************************************************************************************
When you click the SRO's "Save/Keep Open" button, it no long displays an alert when saved.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, when any function in the GSXC pop-menu is run (successful or not), the SRO is
automatically saved and kept open.
******************************************************************************************
The "Items Held Report..." function has been copied over to the Service/Repair Module's
"Reports" menu as well.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new GSX API function on the SRO called "Parts Pending Return".
******************************************************************************************
The "Income Statement {P&L}" report now shows the Account numbers as a prefix to the
Description.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory menu function called "Find By Record#..." has been removed.  It is an
obsolete function from the "PIMS-Classic" days, and is no longer really relevant...
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating an Inventory Transfer for reversal, all button are now reactivated.
******************************************************************************************
When exporting General Journal activity, the "Description" would occasionally have
carriage-returns present.  This would mess-up the exported text.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When choosing a Customer Location on an SRO, after sorting the list, the wrong Location
would be loaded.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A couple of new fields called "CTO CROSS REFERENCE#" and "APPLE PRODUCT BASE#" have been
added to the "Service Info" section (page two) of the Inventory entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "List All Active CTOs..." has been added to the main "Inventory"
menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in EDC Accounting Settings called 
"Synthesize Balance Sheet If Period Not Closed".  If checked, the Balance Sheet 
will Print/Export as though it is "Closed" even if it isn't.  This is a "synthesized"
closing, and only exists for the display of the current Balance Sheet.  No actual account
closing takes place.  If the Period you select is already closed, then the Balance Sheet
acts like it always did.  If it needed to be synthesized, the word "Synthesized" will
appear at the top of the report.  PLEASE NOTE:  If the Period prior to the one being
synthesized is not closed, then don't expect the synthesized Balance Sheet to balance...
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where a Product with "Auto-Loads" was loaded to an Order and was not
set to show on a Product Purchase Worksheet if backordered.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If a product was set to "Remove A Leading 'S'" from it's Serial# when loaded, it would not
remove it from the field on the Order line-item's Serial Number Chooser.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If the "Find By Serial#..." function under the "Serial#s" menu fails to find the Serial#,
and the "AppleDealer" flag is set, PIMS will search again after removing the starting "S"
(if present) from the Serial#.
******************************************************************************************
The "Inventory List For Specific Location..." report has been renamed
"Inventory List For Specific Sub-Location...".  A new report called
"Inventory List For Specific Location..." has now been added.  One is for PIMS systems
that process Sub-Locations and the other is for those that don't.  For those that don't,
negative figures are not skipped.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 14.0.3.9/70.0.3.9 02/12/2016 ********************************************************
There was an issue when refunding a sale back to a creditcard when using Cayan.
This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called
"Don't Trap For Missing Serial Numbers On Invoice".  This turns off the
error-trapping on an Invoice that checks for products that require Serial
Numbers that are missing them.  This is not generally recommended.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Import/Export Module called
"Import Minimum Stocking Levels...".  This allows you to import the minimum
stocking levels for multiple products at a time.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Widget called "Product Availability Calculator...:.  When
run, it allows you to pick a product and see all quantity figures for it along
with the total QTY and SHIP'D from un-posted Invoices in the system.  It's
purpose if for you to have a quick way to see what your stock level is for a 
particular product.  The window for this Widget can be minimized, and if it's
hidden you can select the Widget again from the menu and it will be brought to
the foreground with your information still intact.
******************************************************************************************
The "Sub-Location" processing engine in PIMS has been re-written.
******************************************************************************************
The Order's "Split Commission" dialogbox that pops up when you click the 
"Split Commission" button now loads Employees differently.  Just enter the first
characters of either the Employee Code or Name.  If only one record exists, it
will load the name of the Employee.  If more than one exists, then an Employee
Chooser will be displayed.  The first Percentage which defaulted to zero now
defaults to 100%.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Import/Export Module called
"Import And Replace Inventory Auto-Loads...".  This will allow you to import
Inventory "Auto-Loads" into the system.  Any Inventory records from this import
will have ALL of their Auto-Loads deleted first, and then replaced with the newly
imported ones.
******************************************************************************************
There are three new PIMS Preferences ("More" button):
	Open "SHIP-TO" Fields On Posted Invoice
	Open "BILL-TO" Fields On Posted Invoice
	Open "PO#" Field On Posted Invoice
When checked, these allow this information to be modified on Posted Invoices.
The only exceptions are the "State" fields, Customer Code, and BNAME.  When
modifying the Purchase Order#, any associated Customer A/R ledger references with
the previous P.O.# will be updated.  Modifying any of these fields on a Posted
Invoice is still not recommended.
******************************************************************************************
The Order line-item's Inventory "Polling" function now only displays positive
numbers.  Negatives are treated as zero.
******************************************************************************************
Running the "Update ON-HANDs..." function will now automatically set the "Ready
To Data-Sync" on the Inventory Reconciliation sheet.  Coupled with this is a new
Data-Sync option on the MAIN Location Record called
"RE-POST LOCATION INVENTORY RECONCILIATION".  When checked, any Location
Inventory Reconciliation records sent to the MAIN will automatically run the
"Update ON-HANDs..." function.  This will take into account whether or not you
selected the option of "Counting Held" or not.  If you just check the "Ready For
Data-Sync" button manually,  this option will not be reflected.
******************************************************************************************
When selecting the "Update ON-HANDs..." function on an Inventory Reconciliation",
you will now get an explanation as to the ramifications of choosing "Held Counted"
or not.  You can then cancel this operation is desired.
******************************************************************************************
There were occasional issues with Keyword searches.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new preference in SRO Preferences called 
"PROMISED DATE" ON SRO IS MANDATORY".  If checked, the SRO can't be saved/printed
without one.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new text button called "Resend" on the SRO entry screen (just below
and to the right of the STATUS field).  When clicked, it will resend the current
SRO Status listed.  It will do this regardless of the fact it was sent before.
There is also a new function under the SRO listing's :Function" menu called
"Bulk Send Current SRO Status...".  When run, it will resend the current SRO
Status (e-mail and/or phone call) to each Customer on each SRO selected in the
listing.  This is regardless of whether or not that Status has been sent before.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory Transfer, you can no longer transfer more than you have in stock.
This error-trapping is triggered when you select an "Out" Location on a line-item,
after the Out quantity is entered.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory "Size" field has been extended from 20 characters to 100.  The
field label text "SIZE:" is now a text button that will display an expanded
entry screen to make it easier to enter longer text.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory Transfer, if a Serial# is required for a line-item and their
quantity listed does not match the quantity needed, a warning will be displayed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Inventory Reconciliation screen called "List Missing".
When clicked, it will scan your Inventory records for any ON-HAND quantity greater
than zero for that specific Location.  It will then see if that Inventory record
is listed on that Inventory Reconciliation screen.  If not, it is added to the
list of missing items and displayed.  This will only compare items for that
specific Inventory Reconciliation screen, and not others done for that Location.
Because of this, it's primary use should be for Sub-Location "Cycle-Counts".
******************************************************************************************
The "Quick Scan" feature on the Inventory Reconciliation has been modified.  It
now prompts in the same manner as the Order validation, in that it uses voice
prompts for Part Numbers and Serial Numbers.  It flags you of errors and keeps
going.  Just listen for the prompt when you're scanning away from the computer.
It is now possible for a single person to "shoot" products for reconciliation.
******************************************************************************************
Inventory Proofing Report now takes Sub-Locations into account.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new Forms Designer template Invoice fields called:
	vCustBalanceDue
	vCustBalanceDueTEXT
These two fields will get populated with the current Balance owning for that
specific Invoice when printing.  The Balance is first calculated as the Invoice's
"ORDER_GRAND_TOTAL" (the Order total).  Then if the "PAID" flag is set, the
Balance goes to zero.  If the Invoice is posted and there was at least one A/R
Payment Type, then PIMS will scan the associated Customer record for any reference
to that Invoice.  If any are found for that Customer, then the total of the A/R
Balances for that Invoice will be added together and used for the printed
"Balance Due".  The "vCustBalanceDue" field is numeric and just holds the raw
dollar due, while the "vCustBalanceDueTEXT" field is a text field that holds
the text "Balance Due: {amount due}".  This field is always blank unless the
Order is an Invoice.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer manually enter more Serial Numbers on an Order line-item than
the number "SHIP'D".
******************************************************************************************
When E-Mailing a Purchase Order, the "TO" pop-down meu now contains any e-mail
addresses from the Additional Contacts section of the Vendor record.  The same
is true for "CC" and "BCC".
******************************************************************************************
When making a Bank Transfer from one of your accounts to another, and the
second (receiving) Bank was left at the default, and error would occur.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Some dialog prompts were not accepting keyboard shortcuts.  We have addressed
all we could find, but might have missed some so please let us know.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new preference in EDC Accounting Settings called
"Use 'Sub-Categories' not 'Categories' For Account Overrides".  If checked, PIMS
will use the G/L Account overrides from the "Sub-Category" codes and not the
"Category" codes associated with the Order line-items.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new preference on the Inventory Record's "Service Info" section called
"Remove Leading "S" On Serial#".  If checked, the leading "S" on any Serial#
entered on the Receiving Record, Inventory Transfer, and Inventory Reconciliation
will automatically be removed.  There is also a function on the Inventory Listing
to automatically set this flag on a selection of Inventory Records.
******************************************************************************************
The "Order", "Customer", and "Vendor" Quick-Find choosers will now perform a
"Keyword" search on the name fields.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the functions that consolidated selected Invoices into
PDFs.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report under the main "Reports" called "Summarized Sales Report...".
This report will show all Sales summaries for Locations, Salespeople, Categories,
Sub-Categories, Vendors, and Manufacturers. "Salespeople" factors in
"Split-Commission".  Note that this report differs from other reports in the fact
that all figures are based on Quantity Sold and not Shipped.  These are sales made,
and not money processed.  The status of the TSO (Total Shipped Only) flag is not
considered. 
******************************************************************************************
There was a misspelling in the PIMS standard Search Editor that caused the
"Date Range Macro" to stop working.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When you use "Manipulate Line-Item" on an Order to return an item, and the
number you are returning is less than the number of Serial Numbers originally
associated with that line-item, you are warned to adjust the Serial Numbers
before continuing (choose which numbers are being returned).
******************************************************************************************
On the Order line-item entry page, holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the
"Copy" button (to copy Serial Numbers to the Clipboard) will prompt you to 
delete all of the Serial Numbers listed.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO "Equipment" line-item, you can now enter the IMEI# and be prompted
to convert that number into a valid Serial#.  This is a feature for Apple
Specialists only.  The standard GSX "Warranty Status" look-up does not accept
IMEI numbers.  However, this will convert that IMEI# to a Serial# and place the
Serial# into the Serial# field on that line-item.  From there the standard
Warranty look-up will work just fine.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called
"Default Inventory Chooser To List 'Discontinued' Items".  If checked, the
checkbox on the Inventory menu's "Find Inventory->Quick Find..." function
called "Include Discontinued Products" will default to checked.  It will remain
at a default of un-checked when on an Order.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory Chooser will now perform a keyword search on the "Name" field.
******************************************************************************************
When a Cayan transaction is declined/failed on an Order, that transaction
information is now placed in the Order History section.
******************************************************************************************
When taking an SRO Deposit on a creditcard using Cayan, the transaction info
is now stored in the SRO History.  The same is true for any Decline/failure. 
******************************************************************************************
The "Notes" field on a posted Purchase Journal can now be modified and saved.
However, it can not be cleared and saved.  To save, simply make your entry into
that field and tab out of it.  You will then be prompted to save it or not.
******************************************************************************************
A "BUSINESS CUSTOMER" and "PERSOANL CUSTOMER" flag has been added to the Order
entry screen.  It can be optionally set if the Customer on the Order is business
or casual (personal).  If a Customer is loaded to an Order and their Customer
record is flagged as "Business", then the BUSINESS CUSTOMER flag is automatically
set.  If a Customer is loaded that is not a Business, then the "Personal" flag
is automatically set.  New Orders are set to "Personal" by default.  There is a
PIMS Preference called "Error-Trap On Invoice For Business/Personal Customer".
If this is set, the Order will not default to "Personal".  However, loading a
Customer will default these flags based on the settings on the Customer record.
If the error-trapping is turned on, the Invoice can not be saved/printed until
the Salesperson chooses which type of Customer this is (unless defaulted by
loading the Customer to the Order).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Order menu called
"List 'Blank Category' Orders...".  This will produce a listing of Orders that
have line-items with Part Codes but without Category and/or Sub-Category Codes.
If you hold down the SHIFT key after selecting the date range, only Category
Codes will be scanned.
******************************************************************************************
The "List 'Blank Code' Orders..." function (lists Orders with no Part Codes but
have Price) will now show just Invoices if the SHIFT key is held down when
selecting the date range.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new buttons on a Receiving Record for automatically distributing
products to other Locations and Sub-Locations:
	Distribute All Received Products
	Distribute From Posting Detail
After the Receiving Record is posted, these two button are available next to the
Posting Detail.  They can only be run once after the Receiving Record is posted.
These functions will take the received items on the Receiving record and
automatically create an Inventory Transfer document and display it.  Once there,
you will see each received item twice.  Once for the "going out" which defaults
to the Receiving Record's Location Code (usually MAIN), and another for the
"coming in".  The "coming in" is blank and can be assigned by you to any valid
Location Code.  The "Distribute From Posting Detail" function differs in that it
pulls it's information from the Receiving Record's "Posting Detail" instead of
the regular line-items.  This too will produce an Inventory Transfer document and
display it.  However, any item not for "Stock" will have it's "coming in"
Location Code automatically defaulted to the Location Code associated with the 
Order reference found.  This will insure that the item is transferred to the
correct Location for you.  The only exception is if the Order associated with
the Posting Detail belongs to the same Location as the Receiving Record.  In that
case, the item is not placed on the Inventory Transfer (no transfer needed).  The
only exception is if Sub-Location processing is turned on.  I that case, the
item is loaded as normal.
******************************************************************************************
On GSX Settings for a specific Location, the "UPDATE 'PRICE' OR 'EXCHANGE PRICE'
BY MARGIN" function will query GSX and always update the cost/price figures
from the GSX server when a Part is loaded to an SRO.  This is regardless of
whether it already exists or not.
******************************************************************************************
When running a creditcard transaction through Cayan's WEB Portal interface, a
successful transaction will now close the prompt window automatically.  This
keeps Users from clicking around where they shouldn't...
******************************************************************************************
The "Product Fast Loader" Widget has been enhanced to allow the saving of
multiple lists.  There is a "Save" button that will save the current list.  If it
has never been saved before, then you will be prompted for a name.  If it has been
saved before, you will be prompted to "Update" or create a new list.  These listing
"Groups" of Products are system-wide.  However, if you wish each logged-in PIMS
User to be able to have their own unique Product lists, then click the new PIMS
Preference called "On 'Fast Loader' Widget, Isolate Listings To Current User".
If you have been using the Product Fast-Loader in previous PIMS versions, then
you already have a list of Products.  The system will automatically convert this
existing list to a Group called "My Group".  The first User to pull an unconverted
list will be the Owner of that list.  If you wish to start from scratch, then a User
belonging to "TOTAL_ACCESS" can hold down the SHIFT key when selecting the Widget.
This will prompt if you'd like to delete ALL Fast Loader records.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference called
"Default Inventory Reconciliation Updating To Include Held".  When set, the
Inventory Reconciliation record will assume you are counting your Held items
(recommended) and not prompt you to decide.
******************************************************************************************
The "Export On-Hands..." function under the "Functions" menu on the Inventory
listing now exports "On Order" and "In Transit"  along with On-Hand and Held.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the "Invt'Recon" menu called
"Clear ALL Inventory ON-HAND Numbers...".  This takes "TOTAL_ACCESS", and will
set all ON-HAND quantities on every Inventory record to zero.  The other figures
will be left untouched.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order line-item Input page, the "LINE-ITEM DESCRIPTION", "USER MEMO",
and "NOTE FOR WORKORDER" fields now have a large input dialog window available.
Just click on the underlined title for the field.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Preference option for Cayan transaction processing to run
creditcard Sales and Pre-Auths on the Order's third Payment Type field.  Normally,
this is blocked.  The reason being that Cayan could, under certain circumstances
return an authorized dollar amount less than what the third Payment Type
processed.  In cases like this, the next Payment Type field could be set to the
difference.  However as there is no Payment field after the third one, there is
no place for that balance to go.  In this instance, the third underfunded Payment
would need to be voided.  Please note that you must have the third "Signature"
field available on all Forms Designer "Invoice" and "Salesorders" (if you do
Pre-Auths).
The option is called "Allow Order Third Payment To Run Cayan", and is not
recommended...
******************************************************************************************
When "Clearing On-Hands" or "Updating On-Hands" from an Inventory Reconciliation,
the Inventory item's (for that Location) will now be stamped with the following:
	LAST ON-HAND COUNTED
	HELD AT LAST COUNT
	PREVIOUS ON-HAND WHEN COUNTED
	LAST COUNTED DATE
	LAST COUNTED TIME
This information can be currently be accessed from the "Export On-Hands..."
function on the Inventory Listing.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.3.8/70.0.3.8 12/31/2015 ********************************************************

There is a new Inventory record GSX flag called:
	"This Is A "Billing" Or Other Code Only"
If checked, this GSX item will not be verified along with other GSX "Parts" on
an SRO.  This is primarily for SRO "Parts" that aren't "661-" and "922-" Parts,
but still need to be available to Upload to GSX from the SRO.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO's "Equipment Serial#" field now scrubs the number entered, removing
CONTROL characters, leading/trailing spaces, etc.
******************************************************************************************
All SRO GSX prompt windows have been changed to a Modal floating window type.
This makes them more compatible with Mac OSX El Capitan.
******************************************************************************************
The ShopSite Pro Order download engine has been updated for compatibility with
newer O/S and security.
******************************************************************************************
The last "Interim" Update caused the first line-item of a Purchase Order to be
deleted when clicking the "Delete Item" button, regardless of which line was
selected.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
"Snap Photo On Order Creation And Employee Change (Mac)" has been added to
PIMS Preferences for added security.  If turned on, a new Order will take about
3 additional seconds to display on the screen.  There will also be a similar
delay delay when entering an Employee Code on the Order.  This function only
works on Macintosh computers with built-in camera.  Call for more details on
this function.
******************************************************************************************
When making a Deposit on an SRO through Cayan, the SRO# followed by a "D" is
now used as the Invoice#.  Previously, it was the first 8 characters of the
associated Receipt Journal reference#.
******************************************************************************************
There is a "View Customer" text button on the SRO that works just like the one
on the Order entry screen.  Once clicked, you can view the associated Customer
record.  When finished, you will be prompted to reload the Customer.
******************************************************************************************
When processing any Cayan transaction, the "-" is removed from any Order#
prior to submitting.
******************************************************************************************
On SRO/GSX uploads, POP documents larger than 60k will no longer error-out.
******************************************************************************************
When performing a GSX "Mail-In" upload from and SRO with Billing Codes entered
as Parts, the error from GSX saying those codes are not acceptable no longer is
displayed.  Those codes can exist on Mail-In SROs without any issue, and will
have the "G" code automatically assigned to them.
******************************************************************************************
A new "Remote" menu has been added to the SRO entry screen.  This section is
for remote SRO creation from the field, for those companies doing this sort of
thing...
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record, clicking on the "LOCAL HELD" text will display all of
the Orders that represent that quantity held for that Location.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new field in EDC Accounting Preferences called "Bypass E-mail 'FROM'".
This is where you can now enter a default "FROM" for any A/R Statements that get
e-mailed.
******************************************************************************************
** Macintosh Only:
There is a new function under the Order listing's "Function" menu called
"Selected Invoices To PDF Document...".  When run, any selected Invoices will be
printed to a single PDF file using the selected Invoice template.  When finished,
the PDF document (called "Consolidated Invoices.pdf" in the "Documents" folder)
will be displayed to the User.
******************************************************************************************
When printing a Customer A/R Statement from their record, you are now prompted
if you would like a PDF of all the Invoices associated with the current
Statement.  If you are printing, the consolidated PDF of associated Invoices is
displayed to you.  If you are e-mailing, the consolidated PDF is attached to
your e-mail.  Only "Invoices" are processed, and other document types are
skipped.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking the "Locate" button to locate CEDs, the Version# of the CED's O/S
is also displayed now.
******************************************************************************************
The Bank Reconciliation now has an "Export" button.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.3.7/70.0.3.7 11/21/2015 ********************************************************
When only a partial portion of an SRO Deposit is used and the remainder needs to
be refunded, then the balance is now displayed and not the original dollar amount
booked.  The same is true for Order Deposits.
******************************************************************************************
You are no longer able to cancel a new Order if an Order# has been assigned
ahead of time (having never been saved before).  his will prevent gaps in the
Order numbering system.
******************************************************************************************
There are new "Shipped" and "Received" checkboxes on the SRO for processing
remote repairs that have been shipped in to you.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.3.6/70.0.3.6 11/17/2015 ********************************************************
There was a condition where changing the Book_Cost on a Purchase Order that had
been received would cause the "Change" prompt to be displayed twice.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
If you had the "Automatically Adjust Order On-Hands" checked in PIMS Preferences
and you used the "List CTOs" button on an Order to load a CTO to it, if none
were in-stock then the Backordered flag was not automatically set.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO Equipment line-item, if the "Arrival Date" is left blank, then the
date used for a GSX upload was set to the SRO "Created" date.  It has now been
changed to the date that the SRO is being uploaded to GSX.  Again, this is only,
if the Arrival date is blank...
******************************************************************************************
"Command-M" will reset the menu bar on an SRO if necessary.  Certain third-party
text tools can interfear with the SRO's menu, and this will reset it.
******************************************************************************************
Put in extra safeguards to minimize and insure no SRO record-locks.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in GSX Settings called
"USE THE SRO'S REFERENCE# AS THE GSX REFERENCE#"
******************************************************************************************
A "CANCELED" checkbox has been added to the SRO entry screen.  If checked, the
SRO will not be added to any canned SRO reports and will also be removed from
certain (but not all) SRO listings (sometimes you want to see it in a listing).
There is a menu item to list all "Canceled" SROs, as well as an "Exclude Canceled"
button at the bottom of the SRO Listing.
******************************************************************************************
The new SRO "Reference#" field is no longer directly enterable.  You must click
on the field title "REF#" (underlined) to add text to this field.  This was
done to allow for plug-in customization for specific Reference# requirements,
which is optional.
******************************************************************************************
There are now two new fields on the SRO entry screen for keeping track of both
incoming and outgoing shipping tracking numbers.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Add Alt. Vendor..." has been added to the Inventory
Listing's "Assign/Flag..." menu.  It allows you to an Alternative Vendor to the
selected Inventory records.
******************************************************************************************
The Serial Number record now has a "Rented" flag, used by the Rental Module.
******************************************************************************************
If an Inventory record is flagged as "Serial# Required", then a Serial# is
prompted for when that item is loaded to a Rental Contract.
******************************************************************************************
If an item is lagged as "Serial# Required" on a Rental Contract and no Serial#
is entered, and error is generated and the Contract can't be saved.
******************************************************************************************
Some Custom Search Editors were updated...
******************************************************************************************
The function called "Check Serial# Through ACC..." has been added to the 
Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu.
******************************************************************************************
The Serial# is now added to the printed Rental Agreement (Contract) product
Description field, if it exists for that line-item.
******************************************************************************************
A new menu function called "Find By Reference#..." has been added to the
Product Transfer section of the Receiving menu.  Simply enter the first 6
characters of the Reference# to find an Inventory Transfer record.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.3.5/70.0.3.5 11/03/2015 ********************************************************

New creditcard processing through Cayan, added throughout program.  This includes
EMV (Chip) cards, Debit cards with PIN#, Apple Pay, etc.  For more information,
please view PIMS/Cayan videos at:

	Card Processing:		https://youtu.be/vtnKID6cjF8
	SRO Signature Capture:	https://youtu.be/obWsC-UDgg4

For information on Cayan, and/or to sign up, visit the following on-line:

	http://pages.cayan.com/Executron.html
******************************************************************************************
All of the default Order, Deposit, and SRO Forms Designer templates have been
modified for the new Cayan transaction processing requirements.  Either replace
your existing ones with these, or modify your templates to match.
******************************************************************************************
The "Add Missing GSX Part" area of GSX Settings has been moved to page two, to
make that Window the same height as other PIMS windows.
******************************************************************************************
There is a "Spanish" setting in GSX Settings.  If set, the Spanish language is
set in the GSX call and the date format sent is dd/mm/yyyy.
******************************************************************************************
Screen Width and Height on Windows PC looks to the entire physical screen size,
and not just the application MDI window at start-up.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO now has a "Save/Keep Open" button.  Clicking this will save the SRO, but
keep the SRO on the screen for further editing.  The normal error-trapping takes
place before the record is saved.  A keyboard shortcut of Command-W is associated
with this command.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an "SRO Status Log" kept internally in the system.  This log keeps
track of every change in an SRO's "Status".  You can report on these Status
changes from a new menu item called "Report On SRO Status...", found under the
Service/Repair Module's "Reports" menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Save/Stay" button on the Order entry screen that allows a User
to save an Order while it remains on the screen.  This is only available for the
Order Type of "Worksheet".  The keyboard shortcut is "Command-W".
******************************************************************************************
All Forms Designer default (Stock) templates dealing with Orders of any kind and
the SRO have been modified and brought up-to-date.  If you are using these stock
templates, you should update them in your datafile.  If not, you might want to
consider modifying these new templates to match what you're using.  This is
especially important for those using the Cayan CED payment processing system...
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer Post a Received Record with nothing received on it.
******************************************************************************************
The "PENDING DEPOSITS" listing window on the Deposit entry screen was not
sizing properly on Mac (as of v14).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "List All AppleCare Processed..." listing window on the Deposit entry screen
was not sizing properly on Mac (as of v14).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking the "SRO LOADED" text button on the Order with no SRO linked will
prompt you to link an SRO with the Order.  Only linking takes place, and nothing
else is loaded over to the Order.
******************************************************************************************
Saving an Order as a PDF document from the Order entry screen will now prompt
you for a location to save the document.  Previously, it just saved to the
DeskTop.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function on the SRO entry screen called
"Convert BEATS To Apple Serial#...".  This function is used to convert a BEATS
serial# to an Apple serial# for the point of further processing that item
through GSX.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.3.3/70.0.3.3 09/28/2015 ********************************************************
A new checkbox called "Make SRO 'Status' Field Mandatory" has been added to
SRO Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an a field on the SRO (ONE TIME STATUS E-MAIL SESSION NOTE) where
the Tech can enter a note for the next Status-Change e-mail sent.  Once sent,
this field is cleared.
******************************************************************************************
There are new SRO "Status" E-Mail template TAGs:
	[PROMISEDDATE] - [PROMISEDDATE7]
	[PROMISEDTIME] and [PROMISEDTIME2]
What they do is referenced in the TAG selection listing.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO Status E-Mail templates, there are no longer any "Returns" at the end
of Equipment and Parts listings.  Previously there was a paragraph (<P></P>)
separating these listed items.  This has now been replaced with a single return
(<BR>).
******************************************************************************************
Sometimes due to naming anomalies, an SRO template might have thought it was sent
before when it wasn't.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the text "CURRENT STATUS" text on page 2 of the SRO will now display
the e-mail template associated with that "Status" if any.
******************************************************************************************
There are now two Signature fields on an SRO.  One for signing in, and another
for signing out.  The first and original signature field is still used by PIMS
SigPad.  However, in a future Update PIMS will use the creditcard CED to
collect both signatures for the SRO.
******************************************************************************************
If item were moved from a Purchase Order to another Purchase Order, and the
User clicked "Cancel" on the original Purchase Orders, the "TOTAL" field did
not always update.  This was basically cosmetic, but has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When duplicating and Inventory record, the Weighed and Order Line-Item costs are
not set to the Book Cost figure (basically a "Cost" reset).
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Reference" field (Ref#) on the SRO entry screen.  Use it for
anything you need.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.2.8/70.0.2.8 08/21/2015 ********************************************************
There is now a camera icon on the SRO Equipment listing where you can store
unlimited photographs of the Equipment referenced.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO's "TECHNICIAN DIAGNOSIS" is now copied over to the associated Order.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.2.5/70.0.2.5 08/13/2015 ********************************************************
The GSX Confirmation# has been placed below the SRO LISTING'S P.O.#.
******************************************************************************************
The Order E-Mail prompt now has a checkbox called "Preview E-Mail Before Sending".
If checked, a preview of the e-mail will be displayed before being sent.  You
have the option of canceling or continuing at that point.
******************************************************************************************
The CompTIA selector on the SRO "Mail-In" function window had it's pop-menus
go quite on occasion.  This only happened on Mac, and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Payment Type entry screen, when the checkbox called
"EXTERNALLY PROCESSED CREDITCARD" is checked, PIMS will prompt for the
Authorization Code when that Payment Type is selected on an Order and/or a
Deposit.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in the PIMS Preference's Card Processing selection called:
"Don't Print CC Signature Line If Manually Authorized".  If checked, PIMS will
not print the creditcard signature lines on an Order if a manually entered
Authorization Code exists but there's no associated Transaction ID.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO "Bulk Receiving" listing now show the SRO's "BNAME" (Customer Name).
******************************************************************************************
Looking for existing History on an SRO Equipment line-item only worked on the 
first line.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 14.0.2.1/70.0.2.1 08/11/2015 ********************************************************
The Tracking Number button on the Order entry screen has been updated to newer
Carrier APIs, for displaying Tracking information.
******************************************************************************************
BETA of the new GSX UT API functions.
******************************************************************************************
The Keyword Particle Search (K.S.) button is now visible all of the time, and
no longer requires a plug-in.
******************************************************************************************
The Purchase Order "DROP SHIPMENT" "Customer Code" button was disabled.  This
has been repaired.
******************************************************************************************
CTO discounting now works with Order entry screens.
******************************************************************************************
"List Backordered CTOs To Process..." has been added to the P.O. menu right
below the "Product Purchase Worksheet..." function.  This is the same as the
"Orders With Backordered CTOs..." function found under the Orders menu.
******************************************************************************************
The "Find By SRO Status..." function wasn't working.  This has been fixed...
******************************************************************************************
Backing-up Users/Groups now prompts for an "Archive".  This means that you can
now export and Archive of your backed-up Users/Groups, and then restore them
from this disk file.  It can even be restored to a different server (great for
Updates and multiple Locations).
******************************************************************************************
The "Inventory Chooser" has it's minimum list size increased from 200 lines
to 1000 lines.  There are some U.I. enhancements as well.
******************************************************************************************
The Order entry and POS Terminal screens now have an "E-Mail" button next to the
Print button.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.1.5/70.0.1.5 07/21/2015 ********************************************************
When listing available CTOs from an Order, there is now the option to select
from a specific CTO "Group" (or all like it was previously).  The "List CTOs By
Group" function under the Inventory menu how has a Group chooser as well.
******************************************************************************************
When creating new Departments and/or modifying them, any alteration to the
Accounting "Suffix" was not referenced until the Client was rebooted.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Some of the "Preferences" windows did not properly process the "Close" box.
These are now disabled.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function under the GSX menu in the Service/Repair Module
called "Check Serial# Through GSX...".  When selected, you are prompted for a
valid Apple product Serial# and an arrival date.  Upon entering, the product is
looked up in GSX just like it is on the SRO's Equipment listing.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.1.4/70.0.1.4 07/18/2015 ********************************************************
There is a new checkbox in the "Service Info" area of the Inventory record
called "Flag For GDV Report" (internally "GDV_REPORT").  This is used to
select records for the GDV report.  To aid with this, there is a new "Assign"
menu function on the Inventory listing called "Apple - Flag As 'GDV Report'...".
******************************************************************************************
Fixed "Apple Check Reconciliation" function where the Error export didn't export
every line.
******************************************************************************************
The various "WiKi" listings would sometimes list without a scrollbar.  This
has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Tax Rate" fields throughout PIMS now display to 3 decimal points.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.1.2/70.0.1.2 07/08/2015 ********************************************************
The Inventory record now has a HEIGHT, WEIGHT, and LENGTH field.
******************************************************************************************
Opening different entry screens from another entry screen didn't always open the
proper window size.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO CompTIA Parts Line-Item selector had dead pop-menus under some situations.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Number only" format filter for the SRO "Main Phone" has been removed, and
set back to it's original design.
******************************************************************************************
When prompted for CTO options, and you click "Cancel", the CTO product entered
on the Order line-item is removed. 
******************************************************************************************
Both the SRO and Order entry screens now have a separate Phone# Extension field.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 14.0.1.0/70.0.1.0 07/02/2015 ********************************************************

This new version of PIMS is based on 4D v14.4, and is a complete Upgrade to
PIMS-SQL.  New licensing is required.  Your existing PIMS-SQL Client apps will
update automatically when you initially tie in to the PIMS-Gold server.
Once a Client is connected, please go to the "Import/Export" Module, and select
"Update From PIMS-SQL To PIMS-Gold..." from the "Previous-PIMS-Update" menu.
If you are coming from PIMS-X, then select "Update From PIMS-X To PIMS-SQL..."
first.  Data-Sync should be done for the day, and not running while you Upgrade.
PLEASE WAIT FOR ALL INDEXING TO FINISH, before attempting to connect/user.
Once you are finished updating, it's best to restart the server.
			** This is a free upgrade to any PIMS-Gold v13 Users...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "Orders" menu called
"Orders With Backordered CTOs...".  When selected, an Order listing consisting
of any Order with a backordered CTO item that hasn't been ordered yet will be
displayed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on the Purchase Order entry screen called
"Force As Reconciled".  If checked, that P.O. will be excluded from Reconciliation
listings.  There is also a new function under the "P.O." menu called
"List Failed Auto-Reconciled...".
******************************************************************************************
Some text fields now have contextual menus (right-click in field) and auto
spellchecking similar to an e-mail document.  If a misspelled word is underlined
in red, right-click it to correct.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "CTO_Creation".  For a User to create new
CTO records and/or list/modify them, they need to belong to this Group.
******************************************************************************************
CTO Configurations can now be designated by "Group".  A new sub-menu called
"Find By Group..." has been added to the Inventory/CTO menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new field on the Inventory record called "Password Group" in the
CONTROLS/PARAMETERS window ("More" button).  An optional Password Group can be
entered here that will be required to sell this specific item on an Order.
******************************************************************************************
The Vendor record now has a "LOG-IN ID" and "PASSWORD" field for eCommerce.
******************************************************************************************
The Customer record now has a main Phone# Extension field.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 13.0.1.5/60.0.1.5 05/22/2015 ********************************************************
** Not released to the public...

A "List CTOs" button now displays on the Order entry screen, if the "Apple Dealer"
license is present.
******************************************************************************************
If a Client is flagged as "Remote" (off site), then the Product Purchase
Worksheet now has an option to process remotely like certain reports.  This
dramatically speeds up operation for those Users connecting over the Internet.
******************************************************************************************



**** 13.0.1.4/60.0.1.4 05/22/2015 ********************************************************

PIMS is now compatible with "VoiceShot", the telephony company.  PIMS can make
and receive phone calls.  Right now, there is a "Robo" call function that uses
templates to call Customers when a Service/Repair is completed.  See the video
for more specifics.
******************************************************************************************
CTO Configurations now Data-Sync from MAIN to all Locations, when created or
modified.
******************************************************************************************
There was a fix to the AppleCare Connect "ACC" Invoice template.  If using this,
you should delete your current template and import the new one.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO screen now has "Don't E-Mail" and "Don't Robo Call" checkboxes.  The
Customer record now has a "Don't Robo Call" checkbox as well.  Both associated
checkboxes on the Customer record are copied over to the SRO when the Customer
is loaded.
******************************************************************************************
If a User belongs to the "HIDE_ORDER_COSTS" Password Group, then the updated
"Cost" info on the CTO Configurations Chooser is hidden.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Duplicate" button on the CTO Configurator entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
A new field for Forms Designer called "Page X of X" is now available.  It
populates while printing (ie: Page 2 of 5).
******************************************************************************************
There was a bug when saving certain SROs under certain conditions that caused
them to lock out on any other terminal.  This was introduced in version 13010,
and has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 13.0.1.3/60.0.1.3 05/02/2015 ********************************************************

For those Users with "Apple Specialist" licensing, there is a new function to
aid you in reconciling A Payment Check to Apple.  Basically, you run the "Pay A
Vendor" function, and select an Apple account to pay.  You will see a small red
"Apple" to the right of the Vendor Transactions listing.  Clicking on that Apple
button will prompt you for an Apple Invoice Statement (Excel document), downloaded
from your Apple account.  It will then import it, and compare it to what you have
listed.  It will verify Transactions against that spreadsheet.  From there, you
have several options including flagging verified Transactions for payment, and
even having the option to e-mail an Excel document detailing what you're paying
to your Apple Rep.  There is a new video showing this function in detail.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new hierarchal menu function under the Inventory menu called 
"CTO Configurations...".  From there, you can add and list preconfigured CTP
product lists.  Once you have these configurations entered and linked to specific
CTO Inventory records, you will be prompted to configure options for that product
when it is loaded to an Order.  As with the previous CTO functions, the Cost and
Price for that item will be adjusted accordingly.  To make this happen, go to 
PIMS Preferences (Defaults/More/Page 2) and check the checkbox called
"Prompt For Qualified CTOs".
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 13.0.0.0/60.0.0.0 04/15/2015 ********************************************************

This new version of PIMS is based on 4D v13.5, and is a complete Upgrade to
PIMS-SQL.  New licensing is required.  Your existing PIMS-SQL Client apps will
update automatically when you initially tie in to the PIMS-Gold server.
Once a Client is connected, please go to the "Import/Export" Module, and select
"Update From PIMS-SQL To PIMS-Gold..." from the "Previous-PIMS-Update" menu.
If you are coming from PIMS-X, then select "Update From PIMS-X To PIMS-SQL..."
first.  Data-Sync should be done for the day, and not running while you Upgrade.
PLEASE WAIT FOR ALL INDEXING TO FINISH, before attempting to connect/user.
Once you are finished updating, it's best to restart the server.
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS is certified on Windows 8 and 8.1.  This includes printing
functions.
******************************************************************************************
On Windows PCs, PDF printing of Orders and Purchase Orders is now directly
built into PIMS.No external software/drivers is required.
******************************************************************************************
The "User Screen Buttons" on the new main Splash-Screens have been completely
redesigned.  You can now click on the small "Assign" button right below the
buttons to display a listing of available functions to assign.  Simply drag the
desired function on top of the button you wish to assign.  You will be prompted
with the default button title, where you can change it if desired.  There are
also functions to "Clear", "Rename", and manually enter a function for any
button these special functions are dragged on top of.
The User will only see functions that their Password allows them to use.  They
must also belong to the "ASSIGN_SCREEN_BUTTONS" Password Group to use the
"Assign" button.  ** This currently is only available on the default Splash-Screen.
******************************************************************************************
On the left side of the new main Splash-Screen (in the middle), is a small
process "History" area.  This is a listing of the last popular functions that
you ran.  This includes no less than the last Order listing, the last Customer
listing, the last Order record viewed,, the last Customer record viewed,
the last PO record viewed, the last Plug-In run, etc.  Double-Clicking on a line
in that list will re-run that function/process.  Clicking on the text header
"HISTORY:" will expand the listing into it's own window.  This list is cleared
every time PIMS is rebooted.
******************************************************************************************
Under the main "File" menu, you'll see a new menu called "PIMS Widgets".  This
menu contains the latest "Widgets" for you to select and run.  "Widgets" are
usually little floating windows with data lists being displayed.
******************************************************************************************
WIDGET: There is a new PIMS Widget called "Function Access History".  When
selected, the history of the last popular functions you've run will be listed.
(just like clicking the "HISTORY:" button.  Double-Clicking on any line will
re-run that function/process.
******************************************************************************************
WIDGET: There is a new PIMS Widget called "Products Trending".  When selected,
a window is displayed that lists the products currently being entered onto
Orders.  They are consolidated by PART CODE, and sorted with the most popular
at the top.  Basically, every time a Product is entered onto an Order line-item,
it's added to the listing (if it doesn't already exist) and it's count is
incremented by 1.  This is regardless of the QTY entered on the line.  It is
always just incremented by one.  It's counted even if the Order is not saved.
It's purpose is to show what Products are being entered onto Orders.  This lets
you know how popular they are compared to other products.  It is processed on all
Order types, and is also updated on Orders coming from remote on-line imports.
This data is specific to the Location it's being viewed from and is from all
terminals.  If you have this listing open while creating Orders (including POS
Terminal), you can simply "drag" a line from the "Trending" list onto the Order's
"Add Line" button to have it automatically added to the Order.  You can also
drag it to the "Add Line" button on a Purchase Order.  This listing is
automatically updated about every minute or so.  This list is reset every
night after the PIMS Backup runs.
******************************************************************************************
WIDGET: There is a new PIMS Widget called "Product Fast-Loader".  When selected,
a window is displayed that lists Products of your choosing (your own list).  You
can add and remove products from this listing.  You can add a single Product, a
group of Products you search for, or from a text file.  If a text file is used,
it should be "PRODUCT NAME" + TAB + "PART CODE" + RETURN.
If you have this listing open while creating Orders (including POS
Terminal), you can simply "drag" a line from the "Product Fast-Loader" list onto
the Order's "Add Line" button to have it automatically added to the Order.  You
can also drag it to the "Add Line" button on a Purchase Order.
******************************************************************************************
WIDGET: There is a new PIMS Widget called "Today's Products Invoiced".  When
selected, a window is displayed that lists Products that exist on Invoices saved
in your system.  This includes all Invoices for that day, and includes all
Locations.  Unlike "Trending" products, these are from actual saved Invoices.
The quantities/amounts displayed are based on the Order line-item's QTY sold and
the line-item's "Extension".  This information is totaled up for each individual
Product listed (consolidated), and sorted by QTY sold.
These lines can not be dragged over to the Order's "Add Line" button, but can be
dragged over to the Purchase Order's "Add Line" button.  When drug over there,
the Product is loaded to the Purchase Order along with a quantity equal to the
number sold for the day (so far).
******************************************************************************************
In the GSX function "Update Carry-In", the "Return Types" option has been
updated.
******************************************************************************************
In the Service/Repair Module, the SRO Status section has been modified.  You now
can sort the Status listing by clicking the header above the column and/or by
dragging a line to a new position.  There is also the addition of an associated
bulk e-mail template that can be assigned to a specific Status.  When assigned,
PIMS will check to see if the Status of an SRO has changed when saving.  If it
has, it will check to see if the newly assigned Status has an e-mail template
associated with it.  If it does, PIMS will use that template and send the
Customer listed on the SRO (via the BEMAIL address) and e-mail.  You can change
the name of the Status by double-clicking on it, and you can assign a template
by double-clicking on that cell next to the status cell.
To better utilize this new feature, there are two new fields displayed:
	DEFAULT NEW SRO STATUS
	DEFAULT COMPLETED SRO STATUS
These fields act as defaults for a newly created SRO and one that was just
completed.  By having these defaults, Techs won't forget to change the status
under these conditions.  This makes sure that associated e-mails are sent.
Because of this, the "Completed" SRO e-mail template is no longer specific to
that function and will not be sent when clicking the "Completed" button.  It
will now act like any other status change, and send an e-mail if so directed.
This process is also applied to the "Update SRO Status..." function, found on
the SRO listing.
******************************************************************************************
The "APP\IHW" menu from the full Order entry screen has been added to the 
POS Terminal screen.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox in the Inventory record's "Service Info" area called
"Eligible For AppleCare".  This denotes this product as being eligible for
AppleCare, under certain circumstances.  It's used by some new routines to aid
in selling more AppleCare.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRO, the "PART RETURN TYPE" for GSX has been moved to the  Part's entry
screen.  This is now sent to GSX as part of an SRO "Update".
******************************************************************************************
In GSX Settings when the "SUGGEST APPLECARE ON SRO UNDER LIMITED WARRANTY" button
is checked, the following is enacted:  When you click on the SRO's Equipment
listing's GSX button (blue globe) and the equipment is found to be under an
"Apple Limited Warranty" but has no Extended Warranty (AppleCare), you are
prompted to sell AppleCare with the Part# returned by Apple.  If you elect to,
then the AppleCare product is added to a PPOS Terminal Invoice and displayed.
The Serial# and other required information is already entered for you, along
with Customer information from the SRO.  The APP windows is display as well.
You need only pick a Payment Type and print the Invoice.  AppleCare has now
been purchased for that equipment, and you're returned to the SRO screen.  At
this point, you should re-click the GSX button to see if it's processed yet.
If so, the SRO fields associated with this will be updated.  If the Salesperson
is prompted and they decline, the SRO's "APPLECARE_DECLINED" flag is set.
******************************************************************************************
The "PIMS HTML Templates" are now stored in the Datafile.  When first converting
to PIMS-Gold, PIMS will look to your current "PIMS HTML Templates" folder and
import the Templates found.  Because of this, be sure and have your most current
PIMS HTML Templates folder on the machine that will be converting the PIMS-SQL
datafile.  The HTML Templates can be accessed in the Forms Designer Module, unde
the new "HTML Templates" menu.  If you "List All Templates", you'll see your
newly imported templates.  You can modify them with the entry screen.  Just like
Forms Designer printed Templates, you need to designate which template to use
with each File.  To do this, select "Assign Default System Templates..." from
the "HTML Templates" menu.  Simply drag the desired Template to the PIMS Process
you wish to assign it to and save.  Unlike Forms Designer printed templates,
this assignment is "system wide" (per Location) and not "Terminal Specific".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new SRO search function called "Find By Status...".  When run, you
can select from the default listing of SRO "Status" from SRO Preferences.  If
you hold down the SHIFT key when running this, you can manually enter a Status.
******************************************************************************************
The following functions have been added to the Inventory Listing's "Function"
menu:
		Flag As "In-House Warranty" Item...
		Apple - Flag As GSX Item...
		Apple - Flag As AppleCare Product...
		Apple - Flag As GSX Consignment Item...
		Apple - Flag As Eligible For AppleCare...
		Apple - Flag As CTO Item...
		
******************************************************************************************
In GSX Settings when the "SUGGEST APPLECARE ON ORDER UNDER LIMITED WARRANTY"
button is checked, the following is enacted:  When an "AppleCare Eligible"
product is added to an Invoice, and a Serial# is entered at that point, PIMS
will contact Apple to see if this new product qualifies for AppleCare.  If so,
the Salesperson will be prompted o sell AppleCare.  Just like on the SRO, the
proper AppleCare Product# will be added to the Order line-items.  If the
Salesperson is prompted and they decline, the Order's "APPLECARE_DECLINED"
flag is set.  ** Please Note:  This automated function does not work on any
eligible products that are loaded via the "Auto-Loads" function...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS (PIMS Preferences/More) called 
"Force Manual Serial# Entry (no choosing from list)".  If checked and the Order
User belongs to the "HIDE_SERIALNO_CHOOSER" Password Group, then they will need
to manually enter Serial Numbers when prompted, as opposed to choosing from a
List.
******************************************************************************************
On an Order, a "Split Commissions" function is now available.  On the Order's
"Additional Info" page (COMMISSION PARAMETERS area), there is a button called
"Split Commissions".  When clicked, you can enter up to an additional three
Employees to receive commission on this specific Order.  Clicking in the Employee
Code field will display a listing of Employees to choose from.  Next to that field
is a percentage field.  This can be any number between 1 and 100.  It represents
what percentage of the Primary Employee's (the one listed on the Order) commission
this Split Employee will receive.  Again, this is a percentage of the Primary's
calculated commission amount.  You can have up to three splits, but the total
percentage must be 100% or less.  During any of the four built-in Commission
Export routines, these splits will be taken into account.  The Primary Employee
will have their commission reduced by the amount going to the other Employees,
and the other "Split" Employees will also be listed with their percentages.  To
view this new button, a User must belong to the "SPLIT_COMMISSIONS" Password
Group.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order's "Additional Info" page (COMMISSION PARAMETERS area), there is a
new checkbox called "COMMISSION PROCESSED".  This is only visible if the User
belongs to the "COMMISSION_PROCESSED_FLAG" Password Group.  It can be manually
checked/unchecked but is also automatically checked any time this Order is 
processed during a "Commission Export" routine.  These export routines still
prompt for a Date Range, but also ask you if you'd like to exclude Invoices
where that "COMMISSION PROCESSED" flag is checked.
******************************************************************************************
A change has been made that requires a User to also belong to the Password Group
"RUN_COMMISSION_EXPORTS", in order to run Commission Exports.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a Hierarchal menu item under the Functions menu on an Order Listing.
It has two new functions:

	Run "Raw" Commission Export On Selected...
	Flag "Commission Processed" Flag...

The "export" function is the same "Raw Commission Export" found in "Other Reports",
except that it is run on whatever Orders are selected in the Order listing.
"Commission Exempt" Orders are still not processed.  The "Flag"	 function allows
you to either flag or un-flag the Order's "COMMISSION PROCESSED" checkbox.
The "Export" function needs the "RUN_COMMISSION_EXPORTS" Password Group, and
the "Flag" function needs the "COMMISSION_PROCESSED_FLAG" Password Group.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS Preferences (More/page 2) called:

	"Only Flag Orders As Commission Processed If Paid"
	
If checked, PIMS will only flag any processed Commission Export Order as 
"COMMISSION PROCESSED" if that Invoice has been paid.
******************************************************************************************
Sadly after almost 30 years in PIMS, "HAL" has been removed.  R.I.P. old friend.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS is now compatible with Apple's "iCloud/Mac/Me" e-mails (sending from PIMS).
Please use these setting:
	SMTP:				smtp.mail.me.com
	Port#:				587
	User ID:			Full E-Mail (ie: "you@mac.com")
	Password:			Your normal Apple Password
	Authentication:		LOGIN
******************************************************************************************
When "Manipulating Line-Items" on an Order and Refunding an item on a Posted
Order, the "Previously Paid By" line only showed the first Payment Type unless
you opened the line up to display the whole thing.  The text is no wrapped to
insure you can see the whole thing from the line-item listing screen.
******************************************************************************************
The "Apply Credit" function on the Order entry screen now produces a list of
available credits for the loaded Customer.  They are broken out by,
"Order Deposits", "SRO Deposits", and other.  When you select one to use, PIMS
will "wash-out" that credit on the Customer record for you (consolidate).
There is also a button to click on the A/R Credit chooser to apply the entire
credit balance on the Customer record, and not choose a specific transaction.
This is how it used to work.  In that case, there is no specific washing of the
entries.
******************************************************************************************
If using PayTrace as a creditcard gateway through PIMS, the Recurring Billing
function can now use the Customer Profit at PayTrace for processing the Invoice.
This means no Customer creditcard info saved in PIMS.  Along with this, there is
a checkbox on the Customer record ("CC" button) to inform PIMS that this Customer
should use the card on file at PayTrace for all transactions (including automated
billing).  This will also cause the corresponding checkbox on the standard
creditcard prompt to default as checked as well.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now has a built-in "Dual Verification" system built-in for specific
custom needs.  It provides a "Pass Code" prompting mechanism that will send a
"Pass Code" text message to the corresponding Admin SMS phone#.  Once
authenticated, the function is accepted.  Authentication approval can also be
granted with a function through PIMS WEB Services (choosing a pending request
for authorization) from your smart-phone/tablet.  To have this access, you need
to belong to the "OK_SMS_VALIDATE" PIMS Password Group.
******************************************************************************************
The "PIMS Preferences" menu is now a hierarchal menu, with the following options:

	PIMS System Preferences...
	Terminal Specific Prefs...
	Server Settings...
	ACC Preferences...
	Change Splash Screen...

"PIMS System Preferences" is the original PIMS Preferences, and acts the same.
"Terminal Specific Prefs" is the "Terminal Specific" part of PIMS Preferences.  It
now has it's own Password Group ("CHANGE_SPECIFIC_PREFS") so that Users can change
settings specific to their terminal without gaining access to system-wide settings.
"Server Settings" is the same screen found on the server, where you would set your
back-up preferences.  For those with "AppleCare Connect" licensing, this is the
sane settings screen found in the GSX Settings area of the Service/Repair Module.
It has been broken out for those that do not have the Service/Repair Module.
The "Change Splash Screen" function has simply been moved to this menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new PIMS Preference (More-> Page2) called 
"Category Field Mandatory On Inventory Record".
******************************************************************************************
PIMS-Gold will be compatible with Apple's GSX Aug/2015 Upgrade.  Your SSL
Certificate is ready to load.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu called
"Update Service Excellence Scores...".  It allows you to globally update bot the
Mac and iOS Service Excellence Scores for all Locations that have a "Service ID"
on them (that aren't closed or Virtual).  Just double-click in the first enterable
field, and then just TAB to go to the other fields.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO, the "Under Dispute" checkbox has been moved from the
"Labor Reconciliation" screen to the front of the SRO.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new area in SRO Preferences called "Apple Performance Metrics".  In
This area, you would but the Vendor Code and Cate/Sub-Cate Codes for CPU, APP,
and BTB products.  This is used by the Apple Performance Metrics Report.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new selection under the "Choose Other Reports" dialog for those Users
that have "Apple Dealer" licensing called "Apple Specialist".  There you will
find new reports specific to Apple Specialists. 
******************************************************************************************
New "Apple Specialist" report called "Calculated Performance Metrics".  This
report is similar to the one made available by Apple, that you can use for
comparison and forecasting.  ** It is currently in "BETA" form...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new area in GSX Settings where you set your default "GPR"
reconciliation parameters called "GOOD-PART RETURN ACCOUNTING".
******************************************************************************************
"GPR SENT OFF" and "GPR CREDIT RECEIVED" checkboxes have been added to the SRO's
Parts Line-Item entry.  This is used by the new SRO Reconciliation plug-in, but
can be manually altered.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************







PIMS-SQL From PIMS-X Changes:

**** 12.0.6.2/50.0.6.2 03/17/2015 ********************************************************

From a Customer A/R listing, when you opened a record up and posted a payment
the original listing would be reduced to that single Customer.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When leaving a Forms Designer template entry screen, opened from a template
listing, the listing window returns to it's original length.
******************************************************************************************
When adding a Finance Company to a Payment Type, there was no way to remove it.
This has been solved.
******************************************************************************************
On the POS Terminal screen, it was possible to change the line-item PRICE, even
if the User was blocked.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Assign Auto-Load..." has been added to the Inventory
listing's "Function" menu.  It allows you to assign another Inventory item as an
"Auto-Load" on the selected Inventory records.  You are presented with the option
of Adding or Removing a product.
******************************************************************************************
When loading a Part to an SRO, the "Alert User" and "Load To Description"
functions from the Inventory record are now processed.
******************************************************************************************
When loading a Part to an SRO by way of "Keyword Search", the "Alert User", 
"Load To Description", and Auto-Load functions from the Inventory record are now
processed.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking/tabbing back into the SRO Part's "CompTIA" field, you are
re-prompted with the CompTIA data chooser.  This chooser defaulted back to the
original defaulted state.  This means that your existing CompTIA info would be
replaced with defaults if you weren't careful.  This Chooser window now defaults
to the Part's line-item info when displayed.  This keep you from accidentally 
wiping-out any data you didn't mean to.
******************************************************************************************
The "VENDOR PRODUCT SALES REPORT" now displays and exports the product's
total current ON-HAND figure.
******************************************************************************************
On an Order, if the "Apply Credit" button is clicked while the Customer loaded
has a creditcard on file - the creditcard info would print out on the Order.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When reconciling a Vendor Purchase Order with a Finance Company, the Finance
Company's name is now appended to the Transaction description (as shown on the
payment screen listing).
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.6.1/50.0.6.1 02/04/2015 ********************************************************

When re-printing an SRO or Order Deposit Invoice, the date used is today's day
and not the original date the Deposit was booked.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order listing, the "Reference" and "Marketing" fields have been lengthened
to allow for the full display of Amazon Order IDs.  The "Reference" field on the
Order entry screen has also been lengthened.
******************************************************************************************
"Deposit IDs" are now standardized and unique.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the "Orders" menu called:
"Find Orders That Booked Deposits...".
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with Inventory Reconciliations when a Serial Number issue
was encountered.  It would either create a missing one, change the Location Code
to where the count was taken, and/or change the "Gone" status if necessary.
After these changes were made, you would be noticed at the end.  However, PIMS
interpreted this as an error and aborted the "Updating" of Inventory and any
Serial Number changes/additions were also aborted.  This has now been changed
to an informal warning and all updates/changes are applied (unless there's an
Inventory error).
******************************************************************************************
For GSX and Apple folks, the "Performance Index" has been broken up into two
separate Indexes.  One for "Mac" and one for "iOS".  That section of both the
GSX Location Settings and the GSX Labor Reimbursement screen has been modified
to reflect those User-Interface changes.  The associated GSX Labor Tiers have
been modified as well.  On the GSX Labor Tier Codes entry screen, there's now
an "iOS - Mac" set of radio buttons.  The default is "Mac", to keep with what
you have.  However, if the associated Tier Code is "iOS" related be sure and
select "iOS" on that entry screen.  This will allow PIMS to know which
Performance Index to use.
******************************************************************************************
The "Search Editor..." function for Inventory, Orders, and Customers has been
moved out of the Hierarchal menus and placed directly below the "Find..." menu.
They also have new Keyboard shortcuts of Command-Option-I, O, and C respectfully.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO and Order Deposits now print the Name on the creditcard, when used.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to check/uncheck the "Paid Through Bill-Pay" checkbox on a
posted Check.  There's also a new function on the Check Register's "Function"
menu to globally set that checkbox to "checked".
******************************************************************************************
The number of custom product fields that can be mapped in the ShopSite Inventory
Upload section of Settings has been increased from 25 to 50, to match the
latest ShopSite Pro versions.
******************************************************************************************
The AppleCare Connect settings is now compatible with Apple's new 
"Certificate Only" Authentication system.  User ID and Pasword are no longer
required.
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS is compatible with the latest version of Apple's
"AppleCare Connect" processing.
******************************************************************************************
The "PRODUCT GROUPER" from years gone by (PIMS-Classic) has been added back into
the program, with a modern look and function.
******************************************************************************************
Holding down the "SHIFT" key when posting an RMA will allow you to choose a 
different date to use as the "Posted" accounting date.  The default is the
current date (was "Created" date).
******************************************************************************************
"Default To 'Phone/On-Line' Order" has been added to PIMS Preferences.
******************************************************************************************
Using the Order function called "From "Product Grouper"..." found under the
Order's "Load" menu, you can add Products to the Order line-items.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function on the SRO entry screen ("Records" menu) called
"Create New Unrelated Order...".  This allows the User to create a new Order
directly from an SRO.  This is not to be confused with the button function to
send the SRO to an Order.  This is why the word "Unrelated" is in the new
function name.  The Custom info is loaded onto the new Order if, and only if,
a Customer Code exists on the SRO before running this function.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a way to suggest AppleCare for a Customer when their device is
loaded to an SRO, looked up in GSX, under Limited Warranty, and has "x" amount of
days remaining.
******************************************************************************************
The Purchase Journal screen has a "Duplicate This Record" function similar to the
one found on the General Journal screen.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 12.0.6.0/50.0.6.0 11/07/2014 ********************************************************

** The internal 4D engine and SQL version has been updated to v12.6.  Your
PIMS Client apps will automatically update when you first connect to the new
Server.  THERE WILL BE A LOT OF INDEXING when first launching this version, so
please be patient and wait for it to finish before using.  If you have
difficulties in having your Clients automatically (happens with Windows PC
sometimes), then visit "http://www.executron.com/pimsx/library3.shtml" to
download the latest PIMS-SQL Client installers...
******************************************************************************************
Many buttons and other controls have been updated to be compatible with Apple's
Yosemite O/S.
******************************************************************************************
Many prominent PIMS menus have been turned into "Hierarchical" menus.  This gives
better compatibility with future systems.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS Preferences ("More", Option-2) called:
	"Suppress Order Line-Items Auto-Loads Dialog"
If checked, PIMS will not display the Order Line-Items "Auto-Loads" dialogbox
if any exist.  This is for those who use "Auto-Loads" for WEB Site purposes only,
and not as part of the local Order entry system.
******************************************************************************************
If when posting a Receiving Record and the associated Purchase Order can't be
located, the "PO_REFERENCE" field is no longer cleared.
******************************************************************************************
At a Location, you can no longer create a Purchase Order and receive it
immediately, before that Purchase Order has been Data-Sync'd to the MAIN.  Once
transmitted to the MAIN, it can be received at the Location.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory Holding Report now displays the date of the last time an
associated Receiving Record was posted.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Order Listing's "Function" menu called:
	Export Selected S\J To Text File...
******************************************************************************************
When taking a Customer Deposit, either on an Order, SRO, or Customer Payment,
any dollar amount above $99,999.00 or below $1.00 will produce an additional
prompt to continue (for Special Needs Users that scan the creditcard# into the
"Deposit Amount" prompt).
******************************************************************************************
Reprinting Customer Deposits wouldn't always print the last four digits of the
creditcard run.  Certain printing conditions might also cause it not to print
the first time either.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A Deposit could be VOIDed prior to being posted.  This has been blocked.
******************************************************************************************
The Apple GSX interface and subsequent SRO Parts line-items for Apple Dealers
has been heavily modified.
******************************************************************************************
Updating GSX CompTIA Codes never really made it past Component Group "6".
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Birthday" field on the Customer record would cause an error when modified.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A new checkbox called "DON'T ALLOW INVOICE TO BE REPLACED WITH SALESORDER" has
been added to the Location's Location record.  Checking this will keep the MAIN
Location from sending a Salesorder back to the Location and wiping out the
Invoice of the same Order number.
******************************************************************************************
The small checkbox that's used to Select All on the Vendor Payment screen now
prompts for a Date Range.  When selected, only those transactions with a Due
Date greater than or equal to the STARTING DATE and less than or equal to the
ENDING DATE will be flagged for payment.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an "Export Transactions..." menu on the Vendor entry screen to
export the Vendor A/P Ledger in the same fashion as the Customer function.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new functions under the GSX menu in the Service & Repair Module:
	"Fetch GSX Invoice By Date..."
	"Export GSX Invoices By Date..."
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function found under the "Functions" menu on both the Purchase
Order entry screen and Purchase Order listing called:
"Export Associated Serial Numbers...".
******************************************************************************************
When posting to A/P from a Purchase Order Reconciliation, detail as to which
items, their invoiced quantity, and total cost are posted over to the Notes area
of the associated Purchase Journal.
******************************************************************************************
When posting to A/P from a Purchase Order Reconciliation, you are now prompted
for an option "Note" to be added to the Purchase Journal entry.
******************************************************************************************
IN EDC ACCOUNTING UNDER THE "A/P" MENU (PURCHASE JOURNAL) section, there are
three new search menus:
	Find Purchase By Ref#...
	Find Purchase By PO#...
	Find Purchase By Invoice#...
For "Find Purchase By Ref#...", you need only enter the starting characters...
******************************************************************************************
There's a new checkbox on the Inventory record entry screen (More Info TAB)
called "PRINT BLANK BARCODE".  If checked, the various barcode fields on the
printed Barcode Label will be blanked out.  This only affects the print job.
******************************************************************************************
In EDC Accounting, "Trace A Dollar Amount" not has a keyboard shortcut of
Command-X.
******************************************************************************************
You can now expand the length of the start EDC Accounting "Account Chooser"
window by dragging it's bottom right corner un/down.
******************************************************************************************
The "Location Code" has been added to the printed Sales Tax report.
******************************************************************************************
The Reoccurring Expenses entry screen now has a "Description/Title" field.
This aids you in distinguishing between difference records for the same Vendor,
and shows on the listing.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Closed" flag for Location records.  When checked, this Location
will not be visible anywhere other than the Location record listing.  This differs
from a "Virtual" Location in that it will not be added to any new Inventory
records in the "Loc On-Hand" section.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "File" menu called
"Temporary Location Code...".  When selected, you will be prompted for a different
temporary Location Code to assign to that specific terminal.  This will stay in
affect until it is changed back or the terminal is rebooted.  It you change
Location Codes, then the next time you run this function it will prompt you to
set it back to the previous code.  If you decline, you can change it to yet
another code.  To use this function, you need to belong to the "SET_TEMP_LOC_CODE"
Password Group.  By default, only the Administrator belongs to this.  Even
"TOTAL_ACCESS" doesn't to start.  USE WITH EXTREME CAUTION!!!
******************************************************************************************
There's a new Inventory report called:
	"Inventory Sub-Category Quantities Export For Location"
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in PIMS Preferences (Additional Process Controls "More",
"Options-2") called "Automatically Apply SRO Deposit To Order".  If checked,
PIMS will automatically apply the Customer credit for the booked SRO Deposit(s)
to the Order.  This is similar to clicking the "Apply Credit" button on the
Order.  However, it differs in that the User doesn't need to belong to that
Password Group and only the Deposit(s) amount is used.
******************************************************************************************
Starting at version 12.0.4.5, if you checked "CUSTOMER PRODUCT FOR REPAIR" on an
RMA and attempted to post it without having the items in stock, an error was
generated.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Quick Transfer" function from the Order line-items "Location Polling"
button now prompts for a Serial Number if required.  When prompted, the
Serial Number is optional, as you might not know what it is until it's received.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Import/Export Module under the Maintenance menu
called "Export PIMS Preferences Text...".  This will dump all of the fields and
their data into a text file for you to review and compare to other Locations if
desired.
******************************************************************************************
The ShopSite Pro Settings now have a section to custom configure up to 25
PIMS -> ShopSite Pro "ProductFields".
******************************************************************************************
The USPS Address Verification function in PIMS has been updated to match the
changes made to their servers.
******************************************************************************************
The "Customer User Form" for the Inventory entry screen now has 40 "Custom_Alpha"
fields to choose from.
******************************************************************************************
The "Accumulate Customer" function neglected the following (which is fixed):
	Periodic Maintenance
	Jobs
	Rental Contracts
******************************************************************************************
If a Customer is flagged as "Disallow Sale", then an SRO can't be created for
them from a Periodic Maintenance record.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer book a Deposit/Layaway greater than $99,999 unless a plug-in
overrides it.  It used to warning you and prompt to continue, but now you can't
do it at all.
******************************************************************************************
The ShopSite Pro Settings now have the ability to map any valid PIMS field to
any ShopSite field.
******************************************************************************************
The "Customer Notes" downloaded from ShopSite are now loaded into their own field.
If these notes exist, a small blinking green light shows right next to the
"SHIPPER" field on the Order line-items page.  Click it will display those notes.
Clicking the "SHIPPER" text (underlined) will allow you to manually enter/modify
that text.
******************************************************************************************
If the "PAYMENTS WILL BE PROCESSED OFF-LINE" checkbox in ShopSite Pro Settings
is unchecked, then the word "WEB" will be placed in the Payment Type "Auth Code"
field.  This will lock that Payment field so that any adjustment to the Invoice
total will be dropped down to the next Payment field.
******************************************************************************************
It is now posible to e-mail PDF Orders/POs from Windows PC based machines.
Previously, this function was only available to Macintosh Users.  However, you
need to download "PDFcreator" from "pdfforge" (www.pdfforge.org).  It's free.
Just do the standard install, with no change in options.  PIMS has been tested
with PDFcreator version 1.7.2.  No additional settings are required in PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Order entry's "eBusiness" menu called
"Save As PDF Document...".
******************************************************************************************
E-Mailing Purchase Order PDFs is also available to Windows PCs now, using
PDFcreator.
******************************************************************************************
When "Allow Over Posting Of P.O. Quantity Received" is NOT checked in PIMS
Preferences, you can no longer receive more than the Purchase Order states on the
Receiving Record.  Along with this, you can no longer set the Quantity Invoiced
greater than the quantity received on the Vendor Reconciliation.  If a quantity
received is greater than what was originally ordered, that "received" quantity
on the Vendor Reconciliation page of the Purchase Order will be displayed in red.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the "ShopSite" menu in the WEB Services Module
called "Manually Import Order XML File...".  This allows you to select an XML
Order file manually downloaded from ShopSite and import/process it.
******************************************************************************************
In the Sales reporting, "UNITS BILLED" has been added to the
"Category Monthly Sales Margins Export, Per Location" report.  The "UNITS BILLED"
is the total quantity shipped, unless the "TSO" button is unchecked.  In that case,
the Invoice's "Quantity" is used instead.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS will now accept multiple "TO", "CC", and "BCC" e-mail addresses, separated
by commas (ie: provisioning@executron.com,sales@executron.com) in all e-mail
functions.
******************************************************************************************
As per Assembly Bill 781 (Chapter 532), it is no longer possible to delete
Orders of any kind from the Order listing...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in PIMS Preferences called
"Show Google Map Pin On Order Entry" (More Defaults, Options-2).  If checked, a
Google Maps style "pin" will display in the Order entry's "SHIP-TO ADDRESS" area.
When clicked, it will instruct your system's default WEB Browser to show the
building associated with this address in the new Google Maps.  For this to work,
you must have previously signed into Google and authorized the new mapping
system.  This will just work for the "SHIP-TO" address in PIMS.  If the BILL-TO
is filled in but the SHIP-TO is not, then this function will copy the BILL-TO
address over to the SHIP-TO area before running this process.  If there is
something wrong with the address, then nothing will happen or Google Maps will
be blank...
******************************************************************************************
The Accounting "Closing Report" now has a "Print" button.
******************************************************************************************
Creditcard Payment information will only display on the HTML version of an
Invoice if there is an "Authorization" code, and not just a creditcard#.
******************************************************************************************
The Order's "REFERENCE_NUMBER" is now available to the Order's HTML templates
via the Tag "[REFNO]".
******************************************************************************************
The PO's "REQUESTED_SHIP_DATE" is now available to the PO's HTML templates
via the Tag "[REQSHPDATE]".
******************************************************************************************
If a Purchase Order is deleted at the MAIN Location, then it is also deleted at
the Location as well (via Data-Sync).
******************************************************************************************
If an Order has been downloaded from an eCommerce site, and the
"Add New Customer From Order..." function is used, the new Customer code is
assigned to the Order but no other Customer information is copied over from the
new Customer record.  This keeps he imported Order intact and unchanged.
Also, the "Customer info has been updated on this Order..." message is no longer
displayed...
******************************************************************************************
Now when you click the "Apply Credit" button on an Order, PIMS will check to see
if there are any standing (non-posted) Invoices in the system where that credit
has been applied.  If so, those dollar amounts are subtracted from the available
credit.  This is a fraud-protection measure.
******************************************************************************************
The PRODUCTS IN TRANSIT report (printed only) had some fields out of order.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the Payment Check screen called "Import Ref#'s To Pay".
This will allow you to load a TAB delimited TEXT file containing Reference
Numbers (Invoice numbers) to pay.  The records must start with the Reference#
followed by either a carriage-return, or TAB if more than one field with a 
carriage-return at the end of the line.
******************************************************************************************
The HTML Tag "[VENDORADDRESSBLOCK]" has been added to the HTML Purchase Order
template.
******************************************************************************************
The method for sorting Purchase Order line-items has been modified, and will
take place from this version on.  Placing backordered items on Purchase Orders
directly from an Order will now maintain their original line order position.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new setting in the ShopSite Link Set-up called
"APPLY CHARACTER DATA ENCODING TO "TEXT" FIELDS <![CDATA[...]]>".  If checked,
the "<ProductDescription>", "<MoreInformationText>", and any custom mapped
"Text" field type will be encoded as such:
"<tag><![CDATA[your text data here]]></tag>".  This will allow you to embed
HTML into these text fields, which is normally filtered-out by PIMS during the
Inventory upload to ShopSite Pro.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new report under the "Choose Other Reports..." menu (Inventory) called
"Inventory Item Proofing Report".  When selected, you are prompted for a Part#,
Location Code, starting quantity (ON-HAND + HOLDING), and Date Range.  It will
then gather all information on Inventory coming in and going out, and calculate
a balance for you based on those figures.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report in EDC Accounting's "Choose Other Reports...", General
Ledger section called "General Journal Period Analysis".
******************************************************************************************
This version of PIMS is compatible with ShopSite Pro v12 through Lexiconn.
******************************************************************************************
This is a new checkbox on the Inventory record ("More" section) called
"Monitor On-Hand Changes".  If checked, this Inventory item will have all of the
adjustments to it's ON-HAND figures recorded to an internal file.  Once recorded,
these changes to ON-HANDs can be exported by Part# and Location.  To export these,
select "Export Inventory Monitor" from the Import/Export Module's "Maintenance"
menu.  Use caution when turning this on for an Inventory item, as performance will
take a slight hit.
******************************************************************************************
There was an error generated when exporting the INVENTORY HOLDING REPORT on some
machines.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The manual importing of a ShopSite XML order file has been enhanced.
******************************************************************************************
The Data-Sync process accidentally logged a "Deletion" entry in the "Odd Things"
file for Orders, Inventory, Customers, and Vendors.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
In the "Odd Things" file, anything logged by the Server machine and not a
Terminal had a "User" called "Designer".  This has been changed to "The Server".
******************************************************************************************
Things manually modified in "Area 51" are now more specifically logged in the
"Odd Things" file.
******************************************************************************************
Double-clicking on the Vendor Reconciliation line-item on a Purchase Order now
shows more detail about manual manipulation.
******************************************************************************************
If a Purchase Order is flagged as "PROCESSED", the regular P.P. line-items
section is completely disabled.
******************************************************************************************
You now have the capability to selectively send Quotes from a Location to the
MAIN (Data-Sync).  To do this, select "Data-Sync Quote To MAIN" from the Quotes
"Functions" menu.  You must belong to the "DATA-SYNC QUOTES" Password Group to
do this.  A Quote at a Location can only replace a Quote at the MAIN.
******************************************************************************************
A modification has been made to the Authorize.net processing to force the
proper response to a given call.  This makes up for past problems on their end...
******************************************************************************************
Bug fixes were performed on the ShopSite link.
******************************************************************************************
There have been slight modifications to PIMS SigPad links.
******************************************************************************************
Minor ShopSite bug fixes.
******************************************************************************************
Loading Purchase Order line-items to a Receiving Record didn't always
maintain their original sorting order.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The Posting Detail on the Receiving Record will now be in the same order as the
Receiving Record line-items.
******************************************************************************************
Previous Interim versions did not allow the quantity received to be modified on
and Receiving Record unless it was okay for PIMS to allow over receiving of an
item.  This has been corrected in Interim version v12045z18.
******************************************************************************************
As of Interim version v12045z18, there is an option to reload the Customer
record onto an Order that was downloaded from ShopSite (just like it used to).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new GSX function on the SRO entry screen called
"Create RoR Record In GSX".  This will allow you to upload a "Repair Or Replace"
order to GSX.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO "Equipment" sublisting now has a field for "IMEI" number (below Serial#).
******************************************************************************************
The function "List Unreconciled Labor SROs..." has been optimized for speed and
enhanced accuracy.
******************************************************************************************
A new SRO "Version History" log (similar to Orders) has been added.  To access it,
select "View SRO History Log..." from the SRO's "Functions" menu.  Obviously, it
will only start recording data from this version on...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Purchase Order line-item variable for Forms Designer called
"aPOoriginalPartNo".  This is the "Original Part Code" as found on the Inventory
record, and is not changed if an "Alternant Vendor" is selected.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the EDC Accounting's "G/L" menu called
"List Non-Active Accounts...".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function for the SRO entry screen's Function menu called
"View SRO History Log...".  Just like the Order entry screen, the SRO now keeps
a history/log of various activities that take place on the SRO.
******************************************************************************************
When a "Kit" was loaded from an Associated Auto-Load, it would only add the Kit
item and not it's Components.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
For those processing creditcards through PIMS, the "Card Run" listing now shows
the Payment Type.  This allows you to see which type of card was run
(VISA, M/C, AMEX, etc.).  In addition to this, the "Daily Transactions Report"
has a new printed section called "CARDS PROCESSED".  When checked, PIMS will
scan for creditcards that were actually processed in that date range.  You can
use this summary data to compare against your CC merchant batch deposit.
******************************************************************************************
On an SRO when checking the Warranty Status of an iPhone, the status of the
"Find My Phone" feature is returned and displayed.
******************************************************************************************
The "eSignature" on the Order is now compatible with the "E-Mail Order..."
function.
******************************************************************************************
The "Keyword Search..." function under the Inventory menu now supports the
"Paste" function.
******************************************************************************************
The "Keyword Search..." function under the Inventory menu has a new checkbox
option called "Fast Search, Not As Deep".  If checked, a much faster but more
limited search will take place.  This is better for larger datafiles.
******************************************************************************************
When refunding a Customer Deposit, there is now the option to "Refund To A/R".
This basically means that you can select an "Accounts Receivable" Payment Type
when selecting how to refund the Deposit.  In order to do this, the User must
belong to the "A/R_REFUNDS_ALLOWED" Password Group, and the PIMS Preference in
the "More" area of "Defaults" (Options-2) called "Customer Deposit A/R Refunds
Allowed" much be checked.
******************************************************************************************
On the SRP Parts GSX "Gather" screen ("?"), there is now a standard "FIND" and
"FIND AGAIN" ("?", "?+") function.  The up and down arrow keys work as well.
******************************************************************************************
For iPhones and the like that are Apple "Consignment" items (as flagged on the
Inventory record), sending them from an SRO to an Order will now hold them like
any other product.  Posting that Invoice will deplete them from Inventory.
Receiving them from an SRO will put them back in stock.  No accounting figures
will be adjusted.  This allows you to track this special Inventory for reporting
purposes.  Even if the item is flagged as "Warranty" on an SRO, the Inventory
figures are still adjusted from Invoices and Receiving.
******************************************************************************************
If a GSX service Part is flagged as a "Consignment" item and the
PARTS RETURN WINDOW figure is present in GSX Settings, then the RETURN DATE is
automatically set when that item is added to an SRO Parts Listing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in GSX Settings called 
"PROMPT FOR ALL STOCK ITEMS WHEN SENDING TO P.O.".  If checked, PIMS will display
a list of Parts to choose from when sending them to a Purchase Order.  Parts that
are flagged as "Stock" and/or that are not GSX Parts will be displayed.  If non
are in-stock, then the ORDER checkbox is checked.  You can check/upcheck the
ORDER checkbox to determine what gets sent to the Purchase Order(s).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new button on the SRO entry screen called "PRINT/E-MAIL ESTIMATE".
It uses a new Forms Designer Template called "SRO Estimate.tmpl" to deliver
an SRO Estimate to the listed Customer.  This "Estimate" is exactly what you
would see if the SRO was sent to an Invoice for payment.  The Estimate is
generated for delivery only, and is not saved.  If you select the "E-mail"
option, then there is a default e-mail "FROM" field that you can use as the
FROM part of the e-mail message.  That field is called "OPTIONAL SRO ESTIMATE
'FROM' E-MAIL".  There's no need to create this Template from scratch.  Just
select "Generate Stock Templates" from the Forms Designer "Templates" menu.  Your
existing Templates will not be replaced.  This simply adds those that are missing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox in SRO Preferences called
"PROMPT FOR SERIAL# DURING BULK RECEIVE PARTS".  If checked, any Bulk SRO Parts
scanned on the Bulk Receive window that have "Serial# Required" set will also
prompt for a Serial#.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function on the SRO Listing's "Function" menu called
"Update Selected Status...".  When selected, it will prompt you for a "Status"
to set all of the selected SROs to.  You are presented with a list of choices
(from SRO Preferences), and you can also enter the Status manually.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the SRO listing's "Functions" menu called
"Bulk E-Mail Selected...".  It will allow you to send a bulk e-mail to the
Customers on the selected SROs.  A template is used that can be created/modified
in Service Preferences new "Bulk Mail" tab.
******************************************************************************************
The e-mail sent to Customers when an SRO is flagged as "Completed" now has an
optional Template to use.  It too is found in Service Preferences new
"Bulk Mail" tab, and works the same way.
******************************************************************************************
On the Product Purchase Worksheet, the "STK-ORDER" (Stock Order) column has been
moved right next to the ON-HAND column (just to the right).
******************************************************************************************
On rare occasions, the SAVE/CANCEL and DONE buttons on the Receiving Record
entry screen and list would grey-out.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Service/Repair Module under the "S.R.O." menu
called "Find SROs That Booked Deposits...".  When selected, you will be prompted
for a Date Range.  A listing of SRO Deposits is then displayed.  Double-clicking
on a line will prompt you to choose between the Receipt Journal or SRO entry
screen to view.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a button on the Order line-item entry screen to copy all listed
Serial Numbers to the Clipboard (Pasteboard).  This is the equivalent of the
"Moyer" plug-in.
******************************************************************************************
A menu shortcut has been added to the "Add New Customer From SRO" function.
"Command-5", same as Order...
******************************************************************************************
It was possible to run the function "Add New Customer From SRO..." while a 
Customer Code existed on the SRO.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A menu shortcut of "Command-U" has been added to the "List Un-Billed SROs"
function.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox in PIMS Preferences (Defaults -> More, Options-2) called
"Prompt When Canceling Orders And SROs".  This will prompt the User before
canceling these records from clicking the CANCEL button on their entry screens.
******************************************************************************************
The function "List All Un-Posted Records..." would only list Receiving Records
that weren't posted that had not failed during Data-Sync.  Now it lists ALL
un-posted Receiving Records, regardless of why they're not posted.  To see those
that failed to re-post during Data-Sync, use the "List Failed Data-Sync Posts..."
function.
******************************************************************************************
Two new functions have been added to the "S.R.O." menu:
	List By SRO Date...
	List By Conpleted Date...
******************************************************************************************
The standard "Quick Find..." has been added to the "S.R.O." menu.
******************************************************************************************
A new checkbox now exists on the Checks entry screen called
"Paid Through Bill-Pay".  This is simply a flag for those checks processed through
a "Bill-Pay" process.  It is used for reporting purposes.  Checking this will
automatically check the "Electronic Deduction" checkbox.  There's also a new
function on the "Checking" menu called "List Non Bill-Paid Elect Deducts...".
This will list all checks/payments whose "Electronic Deduction" is checked, but
the "Paid Through Bill-Pay" is not.
******************************************************************************************
SRO Parts will now allow for "Inventory Auto-Loads".  This can be set in Service
Preferences by checking "PROCESS SRO PARTS AUTO-LOADS".  It will work when a Part
is added through either the PART CODE or DESCRIPTION fields on the Parts
line-item.  It will not run when adding a Part through the GSX "Gather"
function ("?").  You can exclude certain Inventory records from displaying the
Auto-Load process from an Order by checking the Inventory record's
"For SRO Auto-Loads Only".  This will display the Auto-Load for that item only
on SROs and not Orders.
******************************************************************************************
The Service/Repair Module now has a complete "In-House Warranty" (IHW) system.
It pretty much works like the AppleCare Connect functionality as related to the
selling of it, except that it's entirely in-house.  Data-Sync insures that all
Locations have access to the Warranty Agreements.  Both the Order Line-Item
Statement text and the Agreement E-Mail (Proof Of Coverage") are User modifiable
with data tags.  Please refer to separate Tech Note/video for further info...
******************************************************************************************
When GSX looks-up an Apple Part, the associated PIMS Inventory record is set as
"Serial# Required" if GSX returns "Serialized=Y".  Previously, this only happened
when the Part was automatically added.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new function under the SRO Listing's "Function" menu called 
"Isolate Completely Received GSX SROs...".  This will isolate the SRO listing to
just those SROs where all of the GSX Parts have been received.  This is handy for
the new Bulk E-Mail SRO function ("your Parts are in...").  This function is also
prompted when first selecting "Bulk E-Mail SROs" as well.
******************************************************************************************
"List IHW Items..." (In-House Warranty) has been added to the main "Inventory"
menu.
******************************************************************************************
The main Inventory menu has been cleaned up with Hierarchal menus.  More to come.
******************************************************************************************
When you select "Change User Access" from the main menu and  belong to the
"REVERT_LOGIN_TIMEOUT" Password Group, you will now be prompted for an optional
number of minutes to automatically revert back to the previous User.  This is for
people who need to give a temporary higher level of access, and want to make sure
they don't forget to change it back!
******************************************************************************************
There's a new function under the "User Access Functions" menu item called
"Change User Password...".  If the current User belongs to the
"CHANGE_USER_PASSWORD" Password Group, they can change their Log-In password.
******************************************************************************************
A "Quick Find..." function has just been added to the "P.O." menu.
******************************************************************************************
The Receiving Record menu now has a "Quick Find" feature.
******************************************************************************************
The Customer Bulk E-Mail function has been completely rewritten.  It can now be
found under the Customer listing's "Function" menu, and is called
"Bulk E-Mail Selected...".  You will be prompted for a Template to use.  Templates
are created using the "Customer Bulk E-Mail Settings..." function found under the
"Customers" menu.  Please refer to a Tech Note for more information.
******************************************************************************************
A "APP\IHW" menu has been put on the SRO entry screen, for product Warranty
look-ups.
******************************************************************************************
The "Dollar Text" line displayed on the printed check did not always print the
correct number of "Dots".  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was a possible issue with Customer records being duplicated at Locations
after a Data-Sync session.  We believe we have this addressed.
******************************************************************************************
It was reported that when "Accumulating" either Customers or Inventory at the
MAIN, that the deleted records weren't being deleted at the Locations.  We made
sure they are.
******************************************************************************************
An "Edit Line" button has been added to the RMA entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
A change has been made to the RMA screen to allow for a different product to be
received back.  This is done by adding the optional "Return Part#" to the RMA
line-item entry screen.  Simply click on the "ACTUAL PART# BEING RETURNED" text
to select an alternative Part to receive back.
Basically, if an RMA is flagged as a "Customer Product", PIMS will not affect
Inventory.  However if an optional "Return Part#" is entered on a line-item for
this "Customer Product", then PIMS will use that Part Code on the associated
Receiving record instead of the original code.  It will also affect the ON-HAND
quantity for that item when the Receiving Record is posted.  This function exists
when you want to give a Customer something out of your stock, and replace it with
the new product coming back from the Vendor.  No accounting takes place.
Please note that the Return Part# will be displayed on the RMA line-item  under
the Received figure.
******************************************************************************************
All text data is incapsulated with "<![CDATA[]]>" (when this option is checked)
when uploading Inventory to ShopSite.  Previously, only the larger text fields
were.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the SRO screen's "Records" menu called
"Visit SRO Receiving Records...".
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer delete posted Inventory Transfers.
******************************************************************************************
The "Specific Product Activity Export" report no longer excludes "Don't Adjust
On-Hands" items.
******************************************************************************************
The "Returned Product Report..." report now has the same type of "drill-down"
function as the "Items Held Report..." report (you can view either Inventory
record or associated Invoices).
******************************************************************************************
A new function under the Purchase Order's 'Functions" menu called
"Apply One-Time Discount..." has been added.  If selected, you will be prompted
for a discount percentage to apply to all line-items.  If the Purchase Order has
nothing received against it, then only the line-items are affected and not the
associated Inventory records.  However, if there are Receiving Records associated,
then they will be unposted, modified, reposted, and the Inventory costs will be
updated.
******************************************************************************************
When refunding a Customer Order/SRO Deposit, that exact Deposit must exist on
that Customer's record in the A/R Ledger.  Previously, and credit/deposit would
do.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Analyse Giftcard File..." has been added to the "Card"
menu.  When run, it will export all Giftcard information, and analyze the current
balance.  It also gives the option of correcting that balance against was has been
redeemed.
******************************************************************************************
When Giftcards are consolidated, the empty cards are now deleted from the
system.  Previously, they were just zero'd out.
******************************************************************************************
The Inventory Chooser window now "Left Justifies" the ON-HAND field.  This allows
for ON-HANDS that have many decimal figures to be read properly.
******************************************************************************************
You can't VOID an Order with any of the following present:
	In-House Warranty Sale (new)
	AppleCare Sale
	Giftcard Sale (new)
******************************************************************************************
The "Inventory Holding Report" had some issues that have been corrected.  It
stemmed from it's interpretation of "Duplicated" Purchase Orders.  This caused
the Purchase Orders listed to be incorrect.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.4.5/50.0.4.5 04/02/2013 ********************************************************

** As with the previous version, the new minimum O/S for Macintosh Users is now
Mac OSX 10.6.8 or greater...
******************************************************************************************
There are some additional controls and options added to the Axia CC gateway
settings in PIMS.
******************************************************************************************
Several new "List" options have been added to the "Payment'Types" menu.
******************************************************************************************
Batch e-mailing Orders from a listing did not set the proper "MIME" type.  This
has been corrected.  E-mailing individual Orders did not have a problem...
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory Transfer, "Incoming" Serial Numbers are now required to post the
Transfer is the associated Inventory record is flagged as requiring Serial
Numbers.
******************************************************************************************
The "Quick Transfer" function on the Product Purchase Worksheet now has
enhanced Serial Number control.  The product "coming in" now has the Serial
Numbers automatically copied to it.  You can also double-click on the line to
alter/enter Serial Numbers as well.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer RMA back more of an item than you have On-Hand.  Doing so in
previous versions could improperly skew your Weighted Cost, depending on what
your initial On-Hand quantity was.  By On-Hand in this case, we mean On-Hand
plus Holding (if greater than zero).
******************************************************************************************
The "List SROs Not Posted To A/P..." function in the Service/Repair Module has
had a performance increase.
******************************************************************************************
On a GSX SRO Part Reconciliation, you can now change the Account Codes used for
the "Freight" and "Other" amounts.  These two accounts can be defaulted to
something other than the default Freight and Inventory accounts by going to
that Location's GSX Settings and filling in the PARTS FREIGHT ACCT and
PARTS "OTHER" ACCT fields.  If present, these accounts will be the new defaults.
******************************************************************************************
The "@" symbol is no longer removed from "Text" fields.  Only "Alpha" fields
remove it during data entry.  A "Text" field is a larger type of field that
accepts "Returns", and an "Alpha" field is smaller and can't accept Returns...
******************************************************************************************
Several extended characters (Unicodes), like those used by MS Word when pasting
or importing into PIMS, are now replaced when uploading Inventory to ShopSite Pro.
******************************************************************************************
On an Inventory Reconciliation, if you have the optional "OPTIONAL CATEGORY"
info present, any items you "import" that don't belong to this optional
Category will be skipped.  Previously, you could import these.
******************************************************************************************
There is now the ability to have two separate Service-ID accounts for the Apple
GSX AppleCare+ Auto-Enroll function.  This is handy for those that have both
"Retail" and "Educational" accounts to sell AppleCare+ to.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on the Forms Designer screen called: "PROTOTYPE TEMPLATE".
If checked, a Template will not be visible in the "Control-Bypass" Template
chooser unless the User belongs to the "PROTOTYPE_TMPL_USE" Password Group.  This
allows you to make and test Templates, but hide them from other Users until
they're ready.
******************************************************************************************
The default Payment Type used for the automated "Apply Credit" function on the
Order entry screen is no longer visible in the standard Payment chooser.  This
keeps Users from selecting it there, and not clicking the "Apply Credit" button.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new option in PIMS Preferences ("More" button) called
"On Purchase Orders, Show Local On-Hand/Order".  If checked, PIMS will display
the On-Hand and On Order figures on the Purchase Order line-items for that
Location, and not the company-wide figures.
******************************************************************************************
There is a completely new "Manipulate Line-Items" function on the Order Entry
Screen.  It replaces the "pop-menu" that used to be there.  It has basically the
same functions, but has a new interface and a new "Refund" function.  The Refund
function allows you to select one of more line-items and copy them over as a
"negative" to a new Invoice.  Any creditcard Transaction IDs are also carried
over, that makes refunding a creditcard very easy.  This process with also
automatically un-allocate the refunded items from any associated Purchase Orders.
******************************************************************************************
The "esc" key no longer cancels an Order.  Too many people were accidentally
pressing it.
******************************************************************************************
There is now the ability to do "dual-coverage" and IMEI processing through the
APP/APP+ Auto-Enroll function for those that have purchased the Module.
******************************************************************************************
PIMS now has an "Access Log" that is accessible to you.  It records everyone
who logs into and out of the PIMS system.  "Notable" activity is also recorded.
To access this log, select "Access Log..." from the main File menu.  The Password
Group needed for this is "ACCESS_LOG".  In PIMS Preferences ("More", second TAB)
there's a checkbox called "On Macintosh, Snap Photo At Log-In" that when checked
will attempt to take a photo of the person logging in.  This is currently only
compatible with Macintosh that has a video device installed.  Everyone will be
photographed, unless they belong to the "Don't_Photograph" Password Group.
******************************************************************************************
The link to "AuctionInc.com" has been updated.  There is now a default 30 second
timeout if the server is not available.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Creditcard Processing option called "OPEN CREDIT" Enabled", and is
for the Axia Gateway Processor only.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Creditcard Processing option called
"Print Transaction ID In Place Of Authorization Code".  If checked, the
Transaction ID for the creditcard transaction run will be printed in place of the
Authorization Code.  This aids in the "Return" process, by giving printed access
to that number if needed.
******************************************************************************************
In Data-Sync, the "RECEIVE EVERY LOCATION INVOICE" setting for Locations will no
longer accept Salesorders.  Only Invoices will be redistributed.
******************************************************************************************
When taking or refunding an SRO deposit, the Customer record is now checked
first to make sure it's not in use elsewhere.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new GSX Setting called
"DON'T UPDATE "PRICE" OR "EXCHANGE PRICE" BY MARGIN".  If checked, PIMS will not
update the associated Inventory record's EXCHANGE PRICE and regular PRICE  from
an SRO with the given MARGIN.  However, "Costs" will still be updated (if set to
do so).
******************************************************************************************
There are three new settings in the Inventory record's "Service" section:
	"Don't Let GSX Update Pricing/Costs"
	"Don't Let GSX Update SRO Line-Item"
	"BYPASS MARGIN"
These act as "bypasses" to the defaults set in GSX Settings for a specific
Inventory item.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 12.0.4.4/50.0.4.4 02/16/2013 ********************************************************

When you experience a posting error on posting a Payment Check, the Payment
entry screen is no longer canceled.
******************************************************************************************
On a manual Purchase Journal entry, the "Auto-Distribute" function now includes
the Department when selecting an account.
******************************************************************************************
A new report called "Vendor Purchase Journal & Checks Export" has been added to
the "Choose Other Reports" section ("Purchasing/Receiving/Trans" area).  It will
allow you to gather a group of Vendors by either "Flagged For 1099" or a custom
search.  Once found, it will export all Purchase Journal and Check Journal
amounts (totals) for each Vendor selected.  This will handle all Purchases and
Payments made to these Vendors for a given date range.  The Purchase Journals
will include any manual Purchase Journal entries plus any reconciled amounts
from Purchase Orders.  The Check Journal includes standard "Checks" as well as
"Payments" made.  Keep in mind that all these records must be associated to the
Vendors by Vendor Code.  Just entering their name on a Check doesn't count...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Check Register's "Functions" menu called
"Total Selected Transactions...".  When run, it will total-up the selected
Transactions from the listing and display the results.  This is a function
that existed in PIMS-Classic, and has been put back in...
******************************************************************************************
A "Run Plug-In On This Listing..." function has been added to the Check
Register's "Function" menu.
******************************************************************************************
In PIMS Preferences when clicking the "Modify Plug-In Preferences" button,
PIMS would replace the standard TAB-bar with the one from the previous screen.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The Rental Agreement now has the same clairvoyant "Keyword" search capabilities
on the BILL-TO "NAME" and JOB SITE "NAME" fields that the Order does.
******************************************************************************************
On posted RMA records, various "text" fields have been opened up for entry as
well as the "Document Storage".
******************************************************************************************
When creating an SRO Deposit after manually adding a Customer to the system,
the Data-Sync flag for the Customer record is forced.  This is usually not
needed, but will force the Customer to send regardless of what the User does
next.
******************************************************************************************
Additional functionality has been added to the standard "E-Mail Prompt"
window, allowing for enhanced plug-in ties for adding custom "Notes".
******************************************************************************************
There are a few new Sales reports (Choose Other Reports):

	Category Monthly Sales Margins Export
	Sub-Category Monthly Sales Margins Export
	Manufacturer Monthly Sales Margins Export
	Vendor Monthly Sales Margins Export
	Manufacturer Monthly Sales Margins Export, Per Location
	Category Monthly Sales Margins Export, Per Location
	
You will be prompted for a Code and a Date Range.  The
system will then scan for Invoices and export the monthly Total Sold Cost
and Price, along with Margin percent, for each month in that range.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Sales report (Choose Other Reports) called
"List Orders With Items Selling Below Cost".  When selected, it will produce a
listing of Orders (by selected Date Range) that have positive line-items being
sold below cost.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Sales report (Choose Other Reports) called 
"List Orders With Low Margin Items".  When selected you are prompted for a Date
Range and sales Margin.  PIMS will then scan Orders for line-items that are
being sold above Cost, not "Returns", and have a sales Margin equal to or below
what you specified.  Those Orders are then listed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Sales report (Choose Other Reports) called
"List Orders With Negative PRICE And Positive Quantity".  This will produce a
listing of Orders where the PRICE field was set negative and not the Quantity.
This could help identify inconsistency in Accounting due to improper product
"Returns".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Miscellaneous Accounting report (Choose Other Reports) called 
"Export Posted Invoice Sales Journal Totals".  When selected, you are prompted
for a Date Range and PIMS will find all Posted Invoices, total-up their
individual Sales Ledger entries, and export them.  You are give the choice
between choosing the Invoice/Accounting date or the date the Invoice was posted.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Miscellaneous Accounting report (Choose Other Reports) called 
"Export Totaled General Journal Entries".  When selected, you will be prompted
for a Date Range.  The date can be either the date the G/L was posted or the
date used for accounting (G/L date).  You will then be asked if you would like
to narrow the list of General Journals entries found (optional).  If you elect
to, then the standard record search window will appear.  You will then be asked
if you would like to isolate a specific account type (optional).  Once your
selections are made, PIMS will export the totals of the accounts affected.
******************************************************************************************
The E-mail (BEMAIL) field has been copied to the main section of the POS Terminal
screen.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to unpost a Receiving Record as long as non of it's line-items
have been Reconciled on the associated Purchase Order.  Previously, if there were
any Reconciliations at all on the associated Purchase Order you were blocked from
unposting any of the Receiving Records...
******************************************************************************************
Two new check-header detail fields have been added to Forms Designer:

	vChkInvDiscDT - the check Discount Date
	vChkDescrpt - the check transaction Description

******************************************************************************************
There is a new button at the bottom of the General Journal listing called
"Export Selected Accounts".  When selected, this will export a report similar to
the "Export Totaled General Journal Entries" report, except that it uses the
records selected.
******************************************************************************************
There are three more reports added to the Accounting's "Miscellaneous" reports:

 	Export Specific Period Balances Summary
	Export Specific Period General Journal Activity Crosscheck
 	Export Specific Period General Ledger Activity Crosscheck
 	
******************************************************************************************
When expanding (maximizing) the SRO entry screen, the "REPAIR ESTIMATE" area
did not adjust.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in the "SRO Preferences" called:
"ON SRO PARTS, PROCESS TIER PRICING DISCOUNTS".  If checked, the SRO will process
the same Tier Pricing Discounts on Parts entered as the Order does.  Parts that
are "GSX", "Exchange", or "Warranty" will be skipped.
******************************************************************************************
In Forms Designer on a Payment Check's header, a new field called "vChkInvoiceDT"
has been added.  It contains the Purchase Journal's "Invoice/Transaction" date.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Forms Designer 2.4 engine update applied.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.4.3/50.0.4.3 01/12/2013 ********************************************************

** The internal 4D engine and SQL version has been updated to v12.5.  Your
PIMS Client apps will automatically update when you first connect to the new
Server.  This certifies PIMS through Mac OSX 10.8.2 (Mountain Lion) and
Windows 8 Pro...
******************************************************************************************
In EDC Accounting Preferences, we moved the "A/R BILLING STATEMENT TEMPLATE"
selector over to page two in the "DEFAULT A/R CONTROLS" area.
******************************************************************************************
To be able to change a Purchase Order# on the Purchase Order entry screen, the
User now needs to belong to the "CHANGE_PO_NUMBER" Password Group.  Prior, it
used to be "TOTAL_ACCESS".  However, it still is not allowed on Processed, Closed,
or any Purchase Order that has been Received against.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "E-Mail Invoice..." has been aded to the POS Terminal's
"Functions" menu.
******************************************************************************************
The "Add New Customer From Order..." on the POS Terminal now matches the same
function on the full Order entry screen and has the same keyboard equivalent 
assigned (5).
******************************************************************************************
The AXIA (USA ePay) creditcard Gateway is now available in PIMS for licensed
Users.  You must be licensed through ExecUtron in order to use this advanced
creditcard processor.
******************************************************************************************
The Receipt Journal now shows the original creditcard Transaction ID.
******************************************************************************************
When "Drilling-Down" from the P&L Report screen, the totals at the bottom
could be overwritten by the previous screen.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
In PIMS Preferences, "Card Processing" Tab, there's a new button called
"Update PMTs Records".  When clicked, the "Processing Required" Payment Type
records will be updated with the current Creditcard processor selected.
******************************************************************************************
When entering an item onto an Order by Serial# that has an associated item that
belongs to a GSX AppleCare+ Auto-Enroll, the selected Serial# was not being
saved on that APP line-item (under these conditions).  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The time a Location goes without connecting via Data-Sync before an error is
displayed is now 120 minutes.  Previously it was 20 minutes.  This is because
many Users are switch from 10 minute sync times to 60 minutes...
******************************************************************************************
A "List This Location..." function has been added to the Location Module's
"Locations" menu.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "CAN'T ISSUE RETURNS".  Any User that
belongs to this Group can not enter a negative QTY, SHP'D, or PRICE onto an
Order.
******************************************************************************************
Both "ACCOUNT ACTIVITY" reports now display a "REFERENCE" field.  Currently,
this field only displays the Vendor associated with a Purchase Journal entry,
as well as Customer name on checking and receipts.
******************************************************************************************
This version is compatible with Apple's resent (10/07/2012) GSX debacle...
******************************************************************************************
Using SigPad, you will now be prompted for each "eSignature Required" Payment
Type on an Order.  Previously, you were prompted once for all three.  When
printing, all signatures captured will now be printed in that single Forms
Designer Signature field.
******************************************************************************************
SigPad now works with "SRO Deposits" and "Customer Pre-Payments".
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory Transfer screen, there is now a checkbox called
"Transfer To Same Location Virtual".  This exists to allow you to automatically
transfer stock from the same Location to a "virtual" Inventory will all
"receiving" and "accounting" handled in one step.  It's mainly for those who
"transfer to "demo".  When checked and the Transfer is posted, it shows that all
have been received and nothing is placed "In Transit" on the associated
Inventory records.  It is intended for transferring to and from the same physical
Location, and you must never "Receive" it on a Receiving Record.
******************************************************************************************
In order to select a custom "Splash-Screen", the User must now belong to the new
Password Group called "CHANGE_SPLASH_SCREEN".
******************************************************************************************
In order to manually enter a creditcard approval code, the User must now belong
to the Password Group "MANUAL_CC_AUTHORIZATION".  In order to change an existing
approval code, the User must also belong to "TOTAL_ACCESS".
******************************************************************************************
The method in which PIMS assigns Order numbers has been enhanced, and can now
handle 1000+ Client requests per second.
******************************************************************************************
Under the Purchaser Order entry screen's "eBusiness" menu, there is a new
"E-Mail As PDF Attachment..." function.  This works the same as the e-mailing of
an Order PDF.  It will use the default Purchase Order template, unless it finds
one of the same name with "-PDF" after it.  In that case, that template will be
used instead.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing "-PDF" versions of templates, the Order and Purchase Order
"Bypass Templates" will no longer be overridden by the PDF templates.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing an Order as a "PDF", Serial Numbers and SigPad signatures are now
added to the PDF.
******************************************************************************************
In Forms Designer when you click the "Load Default" button while in an Invoice
template, our new Invoice template will be loaded.  This template will only
print the Header information on the first page, and the footer information on
the last page (assuming more than one page).  It will also handle large number
of Serial Numbers when printing.  This is ideal for Apple Resellers.  If you wish
to load our previous template, simple hold down on the SHIFT key when clicking
"Load Default" button.
******************************************************************************************
Cleaver Users were able to figure out how to enter a negative SHIP'D quantity
on an Order line-item that had a positive QTY.  This is now blocked.
******************************************************************************************
On the Rental Agreement screen, the "Records" menu "Create Customer From Rental."
now works the same way as the Order screen equivalent.  There is also a
"View Customer" button like the Order as well.
******************************************************************************************
When saving a Rental Agreement, blank lines (no Part#") are removed.
******************************************************************************************
The "CC" information dialogbox on the Customer record now has the proper "TAB"
order assigned to it.
******************************************************************************************
Once an Order has a processed Gift Card as a Payment Type, you can't go back
and enter a Gift Card as a line-item.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "DISABLE_ORDER_TAX_EXEMPT".  Any User that
belongs to this Group will not be able to manually check the Order entry screen's
"TAX EXEMPT" button.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory Reconciliation screen, there is a new checkbox called
"Reviewed Without Discrepancies".  This is an "information only" checkbox that
lets you know that nothing needed to be posted to the G/L (no discrepancies). In
conjunction with this new "flag", we're added the following menu functions to
the "Invt'Recon" menu:

	List Unposted But Reviewed...
	List Unposted Not Reviewed...
	List Posted Or Reviewed...
	List Posted/Reviewed Not Sync'd...
******************************************************************************************
From this version on, Purchase Order line-items will remain in the order they
were created.  This includes duplicating Purchase Orders.
******************************************************************************************
It is no longer possible to enter an existing Employee Code on a new Employee
record.
******************************************************************************************
If an Order# is manually changed, it is now reflected in the Order History.
******************************************************************************************
When using multiple signature lines on an Order without SigPad, the space between
the lines has been increased to accept larger manual signatures.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "SigPad" Preference to allow you to print the Signatures and/or
blank signature lines Horizontally called "Print Signatures Horizontally". This
can also be used by those without the SigPad app...
******************************************************************************************
The "Raw" Commission Export would prompt for a Date Range and then disregard it
after further prompting you to select Invoices.  This has been fixed. 
******************************************************************************************
The RMA line-items now display the Model and Distributor numbers.  These fields
are display only.  You can still enter any of this codes into the Part# field to
load that item.  These fields are only populated from this version on.  For older
RMA records, you can hold down the SHIFT key when clicking the SAVE button on the
RMA screen to load these codes over to the existing line-items.
******************************************************************************************
The RMA record now handles a single "Document Storage" function (Additional Info
TAB).
******************************************************************************************
Multiple "Attachments" can now be added to the e-mailed Order.  This includes
documents stored on that Order (as well as disk files).
******************************************************************************************
Multiple "Attachments" can now be added to the e-mailed P.O..  This includes
documents stored on that Purchase Order (as well as disk files).
******************************************************************************************
When placing backordered line-items from an Order to a Purchase Order from the
"Place Backorders On P.O.s..." menu, the line-items' "Skip Product Purchase
Worksheet" flag is now checked.  If checked, this line-item is not sent to a
Purchase Order.
******************************************************************************************
For compatibility reasons, Customers can no longer be exported to Apple's
"Contacts" directly from a PIMS Customer listing...
******************************************************************************************
The "Year End Updater" no longer runs after the first backup of the new year.
It must now be run manually.
******************************************************************************************
When applying an "Applied Credit" (via button) on an Order, the "PAID" flag is
no longer un-checked".  If the APPLIED CREDIT is the only A/R Payment Type on
the Order, the Order is considered paid.
******************************************************************************************
When an "Applied Credit" is processed on an Order, the Payment Type 1 Auth Code
is now set to the word "Applied".  This doesn't mean it's been processed yet,
but does lock that field so that a User can't manually modify that amount. As it
hasn't been processed yet and you want to cancel it, you'll need to cancel the
Order (if it hasn't been saved yet).  If you can't cancel, then you can click on
the Auth Code to delete it (if you belong to that Password Group).
******************************************************************************************
When uploading Inventory to ShopSite Pro, the character set used is forced to
a UTF-8 format.  This can be plug-in overridden if necessary...
******************************************************************************************
Taking a Deposit on an Order has changed a bit internally.  Along with this,
you can now issue a Refund against that Order Deposit.  To do this, you select
"Refund Order Deposit..." from the Order's "Function" menu.  You must belong to
the new Password Group called "REFUND_ORDER_DEPOSIT" to do this.
******************************************************************************************
When gathering Parts on an SRO from clicking the "?" from a GSX Serial numbered
item, if a "661-" Part loaded that flagged the Exchange Price, the original
Price showed instead.  This only happens if the Part is loaded this way, and has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record, the "wwwPICTURL" field has been increased from 80
characters to 250.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a small checkbox above the Payment (Check) Vendor Transactions
"Pay This" checkbox that will check/uncheck all of the transactions listed.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a process indicator that displays when posting more than 500
Vendor transactions on a Payment check.
******************************************************************************************
The HTML templates used to e-mail Invoices, Purchase Orders, etc. had managed
to get some garbage control characters in them from the Installer.  These have
been removed.  You can update your templates with the ones included in this
update.  The templates are also forced into a UTF-8 standard encoding as well.
******************************************************************************************
Using the "Next Record ->" and "<-Previous Record" buttons on an Inventory
screen while looking at the "Activity" page, the sort order of the monthly sales
would change.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
On the GSX SRO Labor Reimbursement screen, you can now click on the
"VENDOR A/P CODE:" text to change the Vendor associated with this reconciliation.
Doing so will display the standard "Vendor Chooser".  This is primarily for those
of you who need to differentiate between regular repairs and "iPhone/Pad" repairs.
******************************************************************************************
For Apple Resellers using the "AppleDealer" Module, there is now a button on the
Receiving Record line-item entry screen (right below the Serial# entry area)
called "Remove 'S'".  When clicked, it will remove any leading "S" character
from the front of the Serial#.  It will only remove the first occurrence of the
"S".  This helps when Apple prints the barcoded Serial# one place without the "S"
and somewhere else with the "S".
******************************************************************************************
The Serial# entry for the Inventory Transfer line-items now has the same "Find",
"Count" and "Remove S" functions as the Receiving Record line-items.
******************************************************************************************
If a User belongs to the new "MAKE_SERIALNO_AVAILABLE_NOW" Password Group, they
will now be prompted when entering a "Returned" Serial# on an Order line-item to
"Make this Serial# available right now".  This will flag that Serial Number's
"Gone" flag off, and make this item available for sale right away without the
need to post the Invoice first.
******************************************************************************************
There are four new Location Sales Reports ("Choose Other Reports...") called:
	Product Sales Report By Location For Category
	Product Sales Report By Location For Subcategory
	Product Sales Report By Location For Vendor
	Product Sales Report By Location For MFG
******************************************************************************************
The "CONTROLS/PARAMETERS" area on the Inventory entry screen now has a "More..."
button to take you to additional settings.  The "Hide From Order Choosers" has
been mored there.
******************************************************************************************
On the Inventory record ("CONTROLS/PARAMETERS" "More..." button), there is a new
field where you can enter a "Minimum Margin" for that item.  What that does is
prevent a User from selling this item below that minimum margin on an Order.
This can be overridden is the User belongs to the new "SELL_BELOW_MARGIN"
Password Group.  Items entered on SROs and Rental Agreements are not affected
or controlled by this.
******************************************************************************************
On an Order if you run the "Discount All Items..." function, any "NET" items or
items with a Minimum Margin will be skipped... 
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.4.2/50.0.4.2 11/31/2012 ********************************************************
** This was an "Interim" version, not released to the general User-base...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 12.0.4.1/50.0.4.1 08/25/2012 ********************************************************

** The internal 4D engine and SQL version has been updated to v12.4.  Your
PIMS Client apps will automatically update when you first connect to the new
Server...
******************************************************************************************
** This version is compatible with Apple's GSX AppleCare "Auto-Enroll" functions
for 2012.  Additional licensing required...
******************************************************************************************
** There is a new Plug-In authentication system in place...
******************************************************************************************
The "SORT PICKING LIST BY PHYSICAL LOCATION" function stopped working in
v12.0.4.0.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
Purchase Order listings now sort with the newest Purchase Order at the top.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "File" menu called
"Reload Startup Plug-Ins".
******************************************************************************************
There are currently printing issues reported with Mac OSX Mountain Lion.  Lion
and all other Mac OSX's work fine.  Apple knows of these issues, and will try
and correct them in the future.  In the meantime, we have a plug-in available
to help with this issue.  Again, it only affects a few seldom used print routines
for Mountain Lion Users only.
******************************************************************************************
The "Preview" menu function has been removed from Forms Designer.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Order's "Records" menu called
"Customer A\R Detail...".  If the current User belongs to the "ORDER_AR_DETAIL"
Password Group, they can view (not modify) the associated Customer's Accounts
Receivable detail.
******************************************************************************************
You can no longer un-post a Receiving Record that is associated with a Purchase
Order that has been Reconciled or partially Reconciled.  This is just bad
business practice and no longer allowed.
******************************************************************************************
If a "Pre-Auth" on an Invoice fails to capture, the associated Payment Type
field is no longer locked and can be set to something else until the problem is
researched...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.4.0/50.0.4.0 06/30/2012 ********************************************************

There have been many undocumented fixes in this version.  The following is just
a highlight of the most significant...
******************************************************************************************
** PLEASE NOTE:
We are still using the v12.3 4D engine at this time.  We will switch when 4D
v12.4.1 is released, and issue another PIMS update...
******************************************************************************************
This version starts the compatibility with our new suite of "PIMS iOS" products
from the iTunes App Store (coming over the next few months).
******************************************************************************************
When looking at the line-items of older Orders, some of them might display
"Kit Item" under the Line# when they shouldn't.  This was cosmetic only, and has
been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When importing Forms Designer templates or PIMS WiKi's, the current splash-screen
would close and display an improper backdrop.  This has been repaired.
******************************************************************************************
There was a spelling error in the general "Search Editor" (Too/To).
******************************************************************************************
Some on the "number" fields on the Rental Contract line-items would not show,
unless the field was selected.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Written By" Employee is now loaded to the Orders created by the Rental
Agreement.
******************************************************************************************
Heavy modifications have been made to the Apple GSX processing engine, to become
compatible with Apple's new GSX server(s) that went on-line 04/22/2012...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Service/Repair Module's "GSX" menu called
"Last GSX Session Data...".  This will display the "Request/Response" data from
the last call made to the GSX server(s).
******************************************************************************************
The "CUSTOM_ALPHAn" fields on the Inventory record are now 120 characters long,
from 80 characters.
******************************************************************************************
There are four new internal fields for the Order record:
	[ORDERS]TOTAL_QTY
	[ORDERS]TOTAL_SHPD
	[ORDERS]TOTAL_BACKORDERED
	[ORDERS]TOTAL_RECEIVED
They represent the total count of the various line-item figures.  This is mainly
for reporting and printing out on Oder templates.  These figures are calculated
from this version on.  For all past Order records, a plug-in can be run to bring
them up-to-date ("Update Order LI Counts.pi", contact EDC for availability).
******************************************************************************************
"PayPalExpress" is now processed as a Payment Type when downloading Orders from
ShopSite Pro.
******************************************************************************************
The "Polling" screen (Quick Transfer) found on the Order's line-item entry
screen could be hidden if you clicked outside of the window.  This has been fixed
and the window has been enlarged.
******************************************************************************************
The "Quick Transfer" on the "Product Purchase Worksheet" has been enhanced. It
used to initiate a "From" from the Location drug to it, and now does just the
opposite.  When you drag/drop a line from the Worksheet on to it, that is now
the line (Product/Location) you wish to transfer "To".  This is more logical than
the way it was previously handled.  In addition to this, the Quick Transfer
window itself could be hidden if you clicked outside of it.  This has been fixed.
It is also possible to double-click on a "going out" line on the Quick Transfer
window to add Serial Numbers.  You can only do this on a line with an "Out"
figure in it.  Once you enter Serial Numbers, it's automatically copied to the
associated "In" line.  This is optional, as you would probably not know the
Serial Numbers being transferred at that time...
******************************************************************************************
The "All Products Sold" report would exclude items with no Price (but had QTY).
The report has been changed to include these "no-dollar" items now.
******************************************************************************************
There's a new Inventory report in "Other Reports" called 
"Negative On-Hands For Specific Location".  It will display/export all Inventory
items for a given Location whose ON-HAND plug HOLDING is less than zero.
******************************************************************************************
When clicking the "Location Polling" on the Order line-item entry screen,
"Virtual Locations" are no longer listed (by default).  If you do wish to have
them listed, hold down the SHIFT key when clicking this button.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the Purchase Order record's PO# field will send that number to the
clipboard.
******************************************************************************************
To enforce our commitment to our Special-Needs Users, you can no longer receive
product on a non-processed Purchase Order.
******************************************************************************************
A "Credit" RMA can no longer be received against.
******************************************************************************************
On an RMA record, the type or reimbursement is no longer defaulted.  It used
to default to "Credit", but this caused Users to forget to change it.  One of the
three options needs to be checked before saving of the RMA is allowed.
******************************************************************************************
It's now possible to add a line-item to a Receiving Record that was created from
an RMA.  This will aid in "Customer Replacement" situations.
******************************************************************************************
The function "Find Record By Part Code..." has been added to the "Inventory
Transfer" section of the "Receiving" menu.
******************************************************************************************
Adding a Customer directly from an Order has been completely rewritten.  It acts
pretty much the same, except that the new Customer is created regardless of wether
or not the Order is saved.  This also fixes a problem with booking an "Order
Deposit" with a freshly created Customer from the Order.
******************************************************************************************
When on a Product Purchase Worksheet with the "Process Blank Part Codes" option
set in PIMS Preferences, and a blank Part# item was the first item listed on the
Worksheet, the YTDS figures were skewed down a line (out of sync).  This has been
corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The "Items Currently On Order..." report now sorts by Part#.  You can also
click on the top of the columns to sort any column to fit your needs.
******************************************************************************************
The "List "Blank Code" Orders..." report now prompts for a Date Range.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the "Daily Snap-Shot" calculating Gross Profit incorrectly
when the TSO button was unchecked, items were paid for upfront,
a Backordered Salesorder was created and turned into an Invoice, and the backorder
was cleared.  This has been resolved.
******************************************************************************************
** From this point on is a continuation of the v12.0.3.9 interim update...
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Inventory Listing's "Function" menu called
"Flag As Don't Adjust ON-HANDs...".
******************************************************************************************
The window type of the main "Search Editor" has been changed to follow stricter
PC guidelines.
******************************************************************************************
When copying a new Customer from an Order to a Customer record, the First and
Last Name were not parsing for "Individuals".  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The following menu functions have been added to the Rental Module's
"Agreements" menu:  "List Today's Modified..." and "List By Modified Date...".
******************************************************************************************
A new internal field has been added to the Order called "[ORDERS]CHANGE_AMOUNT".
It is filled-in when the "Amount Tendered" button is clicked on the Order,
providing an Amount Tendered is entered.  At the time of saving/printing, if the
"[ORDERS]CHANGE_AMOUNT" field is blank, and there's only one Payment Type, and
the Amount Tendered is greater than zero, then this field equals the Amount
Tendered minus "Payment1".
******************************************************************************************
Two new fields have been added to the SRO:
	ESTIMATE
	ESTIMATE_DIFFERENCE
The "ESTIMATE_DIFFERENCE" is the difference between "ESTIMATE" and the total of
the Parts listed.
******************************************************************************************
The "POS Terminal" Order entry screen has been rewritten.  It now conforms to
the internal rules of the larger Order Entry Screen.  There were issues with
Holding, canceling CC Order, etc. that have been addressed.  The POS Invoice now
"Holds" items when saved.
******************************************************************************************
The "VALUE FOR ALL CATEGORIES" report could produce figures for total Inventory
valuation that could differ from your "G/L" by the amount "IN TRANSIT" between
Locations.  This has been addressed.  The quantity used for valuation is now
"ON HAND" plus "HELD" plus "IN TRANSIT".
******************************************************************************************
Previous to this version, on the Product Purchase Worksheet, PIMS would
automatically order a replacement for any items that were allocated to other
processed Purchase Orders.  Basically, it was replacing the "Stock" orders that
were diminished by the allocation.  This way, you were still insured of receiving
your desired stocking order amounts.  There now is an option to turn this function
off.  A checkbox has been added to PIMS Preferences (More Defaults) called
"Don't Order Allocated Replacement Inventory".
******************************************************************************************
It is no longer possible to create a Manual Receiving Record that is not created
from another document.  "Manual" Receiving Records do not process any accounting
"G/L" functions themselves, and rely on you to do so manually as well.  Most, if
not all, don't.  This could throw your Inventory G/L off and make it no longer
match PIMS...
******************************************************************************************
It is no longer possible to create a new Tax Jurisdiction record with a zero
Tax Rate and yet Tax Rates for Shipping.  Any existing TJs with this type of
configuration will be rejected by the Order entry system.
******************************************************************************************
The Sales Tax report has been modified to reflect "zero tax rate" Tax
Jurisdictions.  The "sales" for these types of Tax Jurisdictions used to show-up
in the "Taxable" amount areas, but now show in the proper "Non-Taxable" areas
of the report.  The column header "INVOICES" has also been changed to
"TRANSACTIONS", as there can be more than one per Invoice.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with the Invoice "Sales Journal" when the TSO button was
unchecked and a Backordered Salesorder was created.  This along with other
factors (rare) could cause the Cost-Of-Goods to be omitted.  This has been
addressed.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to print Serial Numbers on a manually printed Picking List,
and not just the one that prints along with the Order.
******************************************************************************************
The "Physical Location" information for the Picking List line-item no longer
needs it's own field in Forms Designer.  It is now added to the line-item
"Description" in the same manner as Serial Numbers.  You may remove that field
from your FD Template.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new field on the Payment Entry screen called "eSignature Required".
This has been added for compatibility with the new "PIMS SigPad" app for iOS
devices (just submitted to iTunes as of this writing).  If checked, PIMS will
prompt for an electronic signature, provided by PIMS SigPad.  This is detailed
in another document.
NOTE:  For those without PIMS SigPad, this feature can also be used as a side
feature.  If you check this option on the Payment Type record and don't have
PIMS SigPad configured in PIMS Preferences, then PIMS will no longer add the
credit card signature lines to your Invoice line-items.  Instead, it will add
a signature line and tag to a field called "vSignatureImage".  You need only add
this field to your Forms Designer "Order" templates.  This field can be added
from the "Object Library" on the Forms Designer entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
The "POS Terminal" has been rewritten from scratch.  It now acts pretty much the
same as the full Order Entry screen, except it looks like the POS Terminal screen.
This includes no less than "Holding" products like the big Order.  There was also
a problem with running a credit card and then canceling the POS Terminal screen.
This has been addressed.  Expanding the POS Terminal line-item also yields
additional line-item controls formerly found only on the full Order Entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
It was possible under very rare conditions to partially save an Order if it
encountered an error and alerted the User.  This includes holding.  This has
been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to load a "Rental" item on an Order and have it act like any
other item.  This includes properly depleting Inventory and product Holding.
This is if it is manually loaded to an Order.  If it is transferred from a 
Rental Agreement, it still acts as a "Rental" item at that point.  Previously,
no matter how a Rental product ended up on an Order it always acted as a Rental
item.
**There is an option in Rental Preferences to show Rental items in Order
Choosers that must be set inorder for this to happen...
******************************************************************************************
The window type used by the standard "Search Editor" has been changed to allow
it to be more compatible with new "Windows 7" architectures.
******************************************************************************************
The "Pending Deposits" listing on the Deposit Slip entry screen now has a "Sort"
button.
******************************************************************************************
Most of the functions that "search" for a Purchase Order now display the PO
directly if only one is found.  Previously, a listing was displayed even if
there was only one record found.
******************************************************************************************
When printing checks/deposits, the "Already Printed" flag was not always being
set.  This has been fixed.  There is also a "Printed" checkbox displayed on the
Check Register when listed.
******************************************************************************************
On a Receiving Record entry screen, the User is now prompted (warned) when
saving a non-posted Receiving Record.  They can decide what to do from there.
They are also prompted when clicking the "Cancel" button on the Receiving Record.
Too many Users were just "saving" when they should have been "posting".  The
same was true for clicking "Cancel"...
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where PIMS would tag a Customer A/R Statement with a "Dun"
Notice, even if the "late" amount was a credit (negative number).  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Inactive" button is now back on the General Ledger entry screen.  If checked
this simply excludes this account from the "Account Choosers" and disallows it
from being manually entered onto a ledger.  However, it is still present on any
reports it should be.
******************************************************************************************
If a "Single Track" credit card swiper was used and PIMS was set to a different
track number (in PIMS Preferences), a swiped card would enter garbage into the
credit card fields on the Order.  The card was still run properly, and this was
just a cosmetic issue.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an option in the Order listing's "Function" menu to post selected
Invoices directly from that listing.  It will first filter-out any Order that is
not a qualified Invoice before continuing.
******************************************************************************************
When posting "un-posted" Invoices from EDC Accounting, you are now prompted for
a Date Range.  To simulate what it did previously, simply click the "All Time"
button on the Date Chooser.
******************************************************************************************
Most of the "Stock" Forms Designer templates have been modified.  Mostly to be
compatible with PIMS SigPad and other PIMNS iOS apps.  It is also possible to now
run the "Generate Stock Templates" function without wiping-out the existing
Templates.  It now merely generates those that are missing.  Five new Templates
have been added to this "Stock" list including now less than the Customer "Deposit"
types, "open USB cash-drawer, etc.
******************************************************************************************
When "Bulk Receiving" SRO Parts, you will now only see the Parts for the
Location this process is being run from.  If you wish to see all Locations, hold
down the "SHIFT" key when accessing this function.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with printing bulk print jobs (like Barcodes, Shipping labels,
etc.) that was affected by a printer that was having problems.  It might falsely
abort the printing process.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
Serial Numbers have been added to the Packing List when printing.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function in the Receiving Record listing's "Function" menu called
"Selected Receiving Stats".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the main "Receiving" menu called
"List Manual Receiving Records...".  This will list any manually created Receiving
Records (not from P.O., RMA, SRO, or Transfer).  These are important, as they
would have adjusted your physical Inventory but not made any accompanying G/L
entries (nothing to offset).  It was always your responsibility to also manually
create the associated account entries to match this manual Receiving function.
Most did not...  This listing combined with the "Receiving Record Stats function
could be used to approximate what you didn't enter into Accounting, unless of
course you did it properly to begin with :-)
******************************************************************************************
The "Print This Page" button on the PIMS Preferences screen was displaying a
false error message.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Create Customer From Rental..." has been added to the
Rental Agreement entry screen's new "Records" menu.
******************************************************************************************
When changing the Book-Cost on a Vendor Reconciliation, the Vendor Data
(Invoice#, Invoice Date, Due Date) were being reset to blank.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When taking "Deposits" from Customers, "Gift Cards" are now excluded.  Also, the
"Cash" button did not always weed-out creditcards and Gift Cards.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new optional process in PIMS where you can have the User prompted
for a "log-in" after leaving an Order, SRO, or returning from the EDC Accounting
Module.  This can be configured by clicking the "Configure Idle Log-In Prompting"
button in PIMS Preferences.  After turning this function on (system-wide, not
terminal-specific) and choosing which three areas to prompt after, you can choose
the prompting method.  Your choices are "Standard" and "Scan".  "Standard" will
display the same log-in when PIMS is first launched.  The "Scan" option simply
displays a single field where you "scan" (or type) in your access credentials.
These "credentials" are in the form: USER# + ":" + PASSWORD + ":" + OPTIONAL
EMPLOYEE CODE (for auto-employee code entry).  An example for "Admin" would be:
"2:myPassword:RR".  The preferences screen for this function has an area at the
bottom where you can configure a User's credentials by choosing the PIMS User,
entering the Password, and entering the optional Employee Code.  The "Scan"
function will recognize both regular text as well as the same "Basic" authenticated
text used by WEB Browsers.  Entering either will work, and both are generated on
that screen for you to use in scan-cards, barcoded badges, etc.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "PHONE ORDER" button on the full Order Entry screen (next to
"CUSTOMER TYPE" field).  If checked, PIMS will not prompt for a signature (SigPad
option enabled).  PIMS will also put "Phone/On-Line Order" in both the line-item
signature line as well as the optional Forms Designer "Signature" field.
******************************************************************************************
When receiving an RMA for Vendor Replacement from a Location other than "MAIN",
if you didn't have your Location Account Overrides set-up for "Inventory" at the
MAIN Location your accounting could be thrown off.  Your Location Inventory G/L
would be affected on the way out, but your MAIN Inventory G/L would be affected
on the way back in (Received).  We've now compensated for this.
******************************************************************************************
When VOIDing an Order with P.O. Product Allocations, the Order reference was
removed from the associated Allocation records but the Allocation records were
kept.  The previously Allocated were switch to "Stock" and all the numbers worked,
however some reports made it look like these items were still on backorder for
Customers.  The Product Purchase Worksheet would not re-allocate to these items.
We made a change that now removes these Allocation records all together.  Again,
this only happened when Users VOIDed an Order will products that had been run
through Purchasing already.
******************************************************************************************
When making an SRO Deposit Refund, the previous Payment Type used is now
displayed under the dollar amount.
******************************************************************************************
There might have been a situation where the Receipt Journal might be put in a
"Read Only" mode after refunding an SRO Deposit.  This would make it imposible
to take anymore Deposits from that PIMS terminal until it was re-booted.  This
has never been reported, but it has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When moving an item from one Purchase Order to another while allocating it, there
were situations that caused the associated Inventory record's "ON ORDER" quantity
to be incremented by the quantity of the move.  This caused the "ON ORDER" field
to be overstated.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Plug-In Authorization" system for custom and Third-Party PIMS
Plug-Ins.  "Free" plug-ins are exempt...
******************************************************************************************
Selecting the "Object Library" in Forms Designer on certain Windows 7 PCs caused
a window re-draw issue.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.3.9/50.0.5.9 03/30/2012 ********************************************************
** Internal version...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 12.0.3.7/50.0.5.7 03/28/2012 ********************************************************

Some work has been done to Data-Sync.  There were instances were the order in
which records were to be processed was getting shifted around.  This has been
fixed.  However, you'll need to go into your Location records (all Locations)
and click on the "<- Reset Records To Send" button.  This will put them back in
the correct order.
******************************************************************************************
Viewing an Inventory record from the Order line-item while belonging to the
Password Group "READ-ONLY INVENTORY" generated an error.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Missing line-items mysteriously happening on Receiving Records has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
Both "Order" and "SRO" deposits were showing total dollar amounts that exceeded
the amounts for either the selected Terminal or Employee.  It was totaling ALL
deposits for the day and not just the selected ones.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Password Group called "NO_ACCT_IN_SNAP-SHOT".  If a User belongs
to this Group, the "Accounting" part of the Daily Snap-Shot is omitted from that
report.
******************************************************************************************
The "Daily Snap-Shot" now includes the "MAIN" Location in the Location breakout.
Both "Deposit" figures on this report have been modified as well.
******************************************************************************************
The standard Order "chooser" now sorts by "Date", putting the newest first in
the listing of found Orders.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.3.6/50.0.5.6 03/22/2012 ********************************************************

The little green "expand" button for the Payment Check "Header" information was
grayed-out on a posted Payment entry screen.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There is now an "Error Icon" on the Data-Sync monitor window (red scull & bones).
Clicking on it will display the last several errors recorded during syncing
sessions.
******************************************************************************************
When returning a Serialized product to a Location where it was not purchased,
the Location Code of the Serial Number record is now switched to the Location
Code of the Location receiving the returned item (on an Invoice, once posted).
******************************************************************************************
When viewing an Inventory record, the "Sales Activity" is now always sorted
properly (newest at the top).
******************************************************************************************
The e-mail field for Periodic Activities has been increased to 200 characters,
from 80.
******************************************************************************************
USPS Address Verification now works in the PIMS BETA versions, but only for
demonstration purposes.  In the regular PIMS, you need an account with the USPS.
******************************************************************************************
The internal Forms Designer engine has been updated...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.3.5/50.0.5.5 02/17/2012 ********************************************************

When pasting text into the standard Search Editor's "Value" field using the
keyboard equivalent ("...V") and not the menu item, the text would not register
as being there.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with SRO Deposits and Data-Sync introduced in the last
update (v12.0.3.4).  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was a remote possibility that SROs at a MAIN Location could be duplicated
by Data-Sync, if the SRO at the MAIN was left open for a long period of time
while being modified at a Location.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Record History" TAB on the Receiving Record entry screen.  This
information is only recorded from version 12.0.3.5 on...
******************************************************************************************
When sending an SRO to an Order from the SRO entry screen, the "Default Tax
Jurisdiction" (if present) was not always being set.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
On the Bank Reconciliation screen, the "Discrepancy" field is now displayed on
both expanded screens.  There is also a checkmark placed in the "Document Storage"
button, when a document is attached.
******************************************************************************************
When printing SRO Equipment Tags from an SRO, and you had multiple tags, the 
Auto-Choose Print function would only work to the first label.  The following
would go to the computer's default printer.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
A few minnor errors were found with the transfer of "SRO Deposit" remarks over
to an Order created from an SRO.  These are remark only, and didn't always
display with a freshly updated PIMS datafile (converted from PIMS-X).  These
have been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
A bogus error was being displayed when printing an Inventory Transfer listing.
This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The "BEMAIL" (Billing E-Mail Address) on both the Order and Customer records has
been increased to 200 characters (from 80).
******************************************************************************************
There is now a plug-in tie that we can use to default the
"Perform Clairvoyant Search" checkbox to off on most Keyword Search dialogs.
******************************************************************************************
An issue was found where loading a product to an Order with Associated Auto-Loads
where the "Associated" items would auto-backorder, but the original item wouldn't.
This has been corrected.  There were also some redundant prompts for this as well
that were corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When using the Inventory record's "Manipulate Lines" on the Components page,
you can now permanently change the order in which Components are listed.  Simply
drag a line in the manipulator window to the desired location to change the
sort order.  Then click SAVE.
******************************************************************************************
When saving a Search-Editor template, you can now isolate it to that User.  If
isolated, only that current User and anyone with "TOTAL ACCESS" can load it.
******************************************************************************************
Under the "Maintenance" menu of the Import/Export Module, there is a new function
called "List All Search-Editor Templates...".  List will allow you to list all
of the saved Search-Editor templates in the system.  You can delete them, assign
isolated Users, change the name, etc.  TOTAL_ACCESS IS REQUIRED.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Documents" menu on the Inventory Transfer screen.  This allows
you to store a file document on the Inventory Transfer record, just like other
areas in PIMS.  This is the same as the Document Storage on the Vendor record, 
which only allows one document.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.3.4/50.0.5.4 01/24/2012 ********************************************************

Forms Designer enhancements have been added.  This includes the ability to print
very long (multi-page vertically) line-items and have them properly paginate over
a series of pages.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a plug-in tie to clear the "Safety Stock" levels when duplicating an
Inventory record.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the EDC Accounting's "File" menu called
"Debits\Credits Chart...".  This will display the "Debits vs. Credits" chart
that was present back in PIMS-Classic.  Thanks to Rich Rivera for drawing this
back up...
******************************************************************************************
There were occasional problems when listing and displaying A/P Payment (check)
records.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The "Print Screen" button on the A/P Payment screen would be grayed when opening
the record back up for viewing.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When choosing an "Alternant Billing" Vendor on a Purchase Order, this information
is now copied over to the Vendor Reconciliation page's "Finance Company".
******************************************************************************************
There were occasional issues with e-mail attachment compatibility with systems
other than Apple Mac OSX.  This primarily affected Order "PDF" documents.  The
attachment format has been changed to "Base64", which makes PDFs sent directly
from PIMS compatible with iOS devices, PCs, etc.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report in "Choose Other Reports/Purchasing" called
"Specific Vendor Invoices Export".  It exports detailed Vendor Invoice
information for a given Vendor and Date Range.
******************************************************************************************
We've decided to re-use the old SRO "Deposit" fields internally, to give Users a
better way to search and report on SRO Deposits (thanks Don!).

The old fields,

	[SROs]DEPOSIT_TAKEN
	[SROs]DEPOSIT_AMOUNT
	[SROs]DEPOSIT_DATE
	[SROs]DEPOSIT_REFERENCE

will now once again be populated with the deposit info.  For multiple deposits on
an SRO, the "DEPOSIT_AMOUNT" will be equal to the total of all the deposits,
the "DEPOSIT_DATE" will be set to the most resent, and the "DEPOSIT_REFERENCE"
will be set to the word "Multiple" (else the single Ref#).

You'll need to run an update routine on existing datafiles.  It's called
"Update Existing PIMS SRO Deposits...", and is found in the Import/Export
Module's "Maintenance" menu.
******************************************************************************************
Product "SALES RANKING" report no longer contains Components.
******************************************************************************************
Posting an Invoice line-item with "Bundle" items listed will no longer update
those associated Inventory record monthly Dollars Sold.  Again, this is only for
that Bundle item on that Order line-item.  The "Quantity Used" is still updated.
******************************************************************************************
When "Updating On-Hands" from an Inventory Reconciliation, the following changes
have been made to processing the Serial Numbers (if any):

	If a Serial# is flagged as "GONE", then it is changed to not GONE.
	
	If a Serial# belongs to a different Location Code, then it is set to the
	Location Code of the Inventory Reconciliation.
******************************************************************************************
Some records with very long Reference Numbers (UUID codes) can have that Ref#
placed on the clipboard, simply by clicking on it.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a 4th option for the Product Purchase Worksheet's "SOLD YTD"
right-click function called "Comprehensive Sales".  This allows the User to pick
a Date Range to scan.  This will scan for sales for that specific item, for
that specific Location, during that date range.  The quantity sold, shipped, and
approximate profit information will then be displayed.  The Invoices themselves
are scanned, and not the Inventory records like the other functions.  Because of
this, be careful of the date range selected...
******************************************************************************************
The word "Credit" had a typo in a few places, and has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When posting a Receiving Record that came from an RMA, "required Serial Numbers"
were not being prompted for.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
GSX USERS:  Don't forget to go in to your PIMS GSX Settings and change the
"GSX HOST" from "gsxws2.apple.com" to "gsx.apple.com" on February 12, 2012.
PIMS will not do this automatically.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where a Warranty Part on an SRO was copied over to an Invoice,
where the Serial# copied over as well, where a Serial# record was created with
no Part#.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The "Custom User" splash-screen now has eight of the custom screen buttons
available.  There are four at the top and four at the bottom.  They are only 
visible if individually activated.
******************************************************************************************
Many of the default "Forms Designer" templates have been updated to deal with
long-page printing of huge "Description" fields...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.3.3/50.0.5.3 12/28/2011 ********************************************************

On the Customer's "Additional Locations" screen, the "ENTER" key was assigned to
both the "Add" and "Edit" buttons.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
On slower systems, the Order's "List Associated P.O.s..." function could timeout
and produce an error message.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
All line-item serialization of records has been updated to compensate for an
internal 4D SQL error that could have caused missing records (very rare).
******************************************************************************************
During Data-Sync, Serial# transfers from one Location to another weren't always
making it to the final Location (the one receiving them).  They always changed
at the MAIN, but didn't at the receiving Location.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When you had the "Auto Employee Code" activated for a PIMS session, then every
time you opened an Inventory Transfer the Employee code would be changed to the
Auto-Load" one.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
To further our on-going efforts to better support our "Special Needs" Users,
and those who hire directly from the circus (when in town), we now error-trap
for those Users who attempt to take a Gift Card as payment for a Gift Card on an
Order...
******************************************************************************************
There were some issues when it can to Serial Numbers and the
"Inventory Tally Sheet..." function.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
An attempt has been made to compensate for slow Client connections as related
to the "Quick Find" record choosers.
******************************************************************************************
When creating a new Customer from an Order, the Tax Jurisdiction is no longer
copied over to the Customer record.
******************************************************************************************
Forms Designer Module has been updated.  The issue of overly large Order
line-item's "Description" field spilling off of the page still exists, and we
are working to correct that...
******************************************************************************************
If a User had Inventory record and SRO access with "Read-Only" access to
Inventory, they could get to the Inventory record and modify it anyway from the
SRO screen.  The same was true for Customer records.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There are now plug-in ties for both the SRO/GSX Equipment "Description" field
information (so there can be minimal GSX equipment Description), and the
SRO "Completed E-Mail".
******************************************************************************************
The Product Purchase Worksheet now exports the "Model#" as well during the
"Export Summary" function.
******************************************************************************************
Using the keyboard "shortcut" key for "Paste" on the EDC Search Editor will now
place the contents of the Clipboard in the Search Data field.
******************************************************************************************
Occasionally, Order line-items Bundle items were not loading/printing in the
order they were entered.  An attempt has been made to address this.
******************************************************************************************
The "Print Screen" function on the Checking entry screen was causing an error
message to be displayed.  It printed anyway, but has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When e-mailing an Order, all three (To, CC, BCC) destination fields were
populated with the default Order e-mail.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was a loophole found in crediting two creditcards on the same Order, where
the User could select the wrong Transaction ID.  This loophole has been closed.
******************************************************************************************
The field title for the Order's Tracking Numbers field ("TRTACKING NUMBERS") is
now a hyperlink button.  If you have the words "UPS, FedEx, or "USPS" present in
the Order's "Shipper" field and click this button, your default WEB browser will
display the tracking information for those numbers.  For UPS and FedEx, multiple
Tracking Numbers will be displayed.  For USPS (US Post Office), only the first
Tracking Number is processed.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new "TAGs" for the Order's HTML templates, that use the new Shipper
tracking number link engine (as described above).  The TAG "[TRACKINGLINK]" will
be replaced with the "Http" link for either of the three possible Order Shippers.
The link will be preceded by the text "Track Order: ".  The second TAG
"[TRACKINGLINK2]" is exactly the same, but is not preceded by any text (can be
used as a reference for an HTML button etc.).
******************************************************************************************
The Order line-item "Description" field had difficulties doing clairvoyant
searches with word segments that ended with periods (".").  This was an SQL
incompatibility that we compensated for.
******************************************************************************************
Back by popular demand, the "TSO" button on Backordered Salesorders.
******************************************************************************************
When using the function that attached an Order PDF to an e-mail, if a bypass
Invoice template existed on the Order, the bypass Invoice template was used
regardless of the Order type.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
If a Purchase Order line-item has an Alternative Part# entered, then the
"Distributor Code" displayed is the Alt. Part# and not the "Distributor Code"
from the Inventory record.
******************************************************************************************
There are now "Plug-In" ties to set a variety of defaults on the Order
"E-Mail" prompt.  This includes a "Note" selector, additional "TO, CC, BCC"
selections, etc.  Requires custom plug-in.
******************************************************************************************
The "Purchase Order History" section has considerably more detail added to it.
******************************************************************************************
Documents attached to an Order would only show on the original Order and not on
any subsequent Backordered Salesorders ("-A's").  This has been addressed.  They
are still cleared from Duplicated Orders however.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with redistributing P.O. Allocation records between Locations.
This has been resolved.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************




**** 12.0.3.0/50.0.5.0 11/23/2011 ********************************************************

There is a new button called "Export Selected As PIMS Records" at the bottom of
the Forms Designer Template listing.  There is a corresponding function in the
Forms Designer Module's "Templates" menu called "Import Templates..." used to
import these exported records.
******************************************************************************************
Back by popular demand; the original DSM "Date Chooser" is back!...
******************************************************************************************
There is now an "Import WiKi Records..." function in the WiKi Module.
******************************************************************************************
In Forms Designer, the "Business Ship-Address Block" has been added as a
field variable.
******************************************************************************************
When re-sizing the Order entry screen, some of the "Payment" buttons didn't
always readjust.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
On GSX Carry-In and Mail-In orders, the "Time" uploaded could be in the future.
This would only happen if an SRO was created, saved, and then opened up at a 
future date at which point the equipment being processed was entered.  This is
pretty rare, but seemed to have happened to a few Service Providers?  This has
been compensated for.  If that's the case, the Time is now set to the current
time minus 10 minutes (for good measure)...
******************************************************************************************
When using PayTrace as your creditcard gateway and refunding an SRO deposit on
the same day it was booked, it treated the transaction as a "Refund" and not a
"Void".  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
When PayTrace issues a successful Refund/Void, it doesn't return an Authorization
code like other processors.  This causes the User to have to enter a code
manually (and text, actually).  We now compensate for this by issuing "N/A" as an
approval code.
******************************************************************************************
When using a "Day Pass", a small dialogbox was displayed in the lower right
hand corner of the server screen.  In Mac OSX Lion (10.7.2), this dialogbox
could cause the server menus to not fully display until this dialogbox was closed.
This could cause people grief, so this dialogbox no longer is displayed.
******************************************************************************************
When starting a new server and datafile, you are now prompted right away for
your EDC Account Information (if missing).
******************************************************************************************
There might have been an issue wit the Tech Commission Export, as related to
"Total Billable Time".  The exported format for this data has been altered.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new Form object for iPhone Client templates that will suppress the
"Basic Authentication" (User/Password) mechanism.  This is for those occasions
when you want to give general public access to data in your system.  To suppress
WEB security for a given function, simply create a "hidden" form object with the
text "PUBLIC-ACCESS-OK" in it some where.  Here's an example:
	 <input type="hidden" name="SECURITY" value="PUBLIC-ACCESS-OK" />
Having this will suppress the User/Password request on the browser.
******************************************************************************************
Along with the above iPhone Client change, there is a new plug-in for Apple
Resellers and Service Providers to allow Customers to check the status of a
repair (SRO) by giving the SRO# and Zipcode.  No User ID or Password is required.
Example request and response templates for iPhone are given.  There is a nominal
fee for this plug-in...
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue on the "Loc On-Hands" section of the Inventory record where
if you have more than 16 Locations listed and select one that requires you to
scroll down, it would not allow you to easily enter Safety Stock levels.  It
would scroll back up.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue of putting the text "Order date changed from..." in the Order's
"Order History" every time the Order was opened and displayed.  This happened
even though the Order date had not been changed.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
For those Users who have Virtual Locations and have elected to allow them to
be listed in the Location pop-menus anyway, these same Virtual Locations were
showing up in the Data-Sync Monitor window at the MAIN.  These have been removed.
******************************************************************************************
The serialization and linking of Order line-items has been strengthened.
******************************************************************************************
Back by popular demand - the Order's "Keyword Search" button.  Using this button,
you can select from multiple items found.  A plug-in is required to display this
button...
******************************************************************************************
When on a Vendor Payment screen, the function to "Pay With Another Vendor"
(little VISA button) has been completely rewritten.  It now creates a Purchase
Journal crediting the original Vendor and another Purchase Journal for the
receiving Vendor record.  This accomplishes basically the same thing, except
there is a much better audit trail and the Historical A/P History now reflects
this move.
******************************************************************************************
As part of a diagnostic call, holding down the SHIFT key while Data-Sync was 
running would display the raw text of any incoming call.  This function has
been removed.  Users who occasionally ran a Client on the Server machine were
running into problems of dropping the Data-Sync process into diagnostic mode by
mistake...
******************************************************************************************
Now on any Backordered Invoice (from "-n" Salesorder), the TSO (Total Shipped
Only) button is removed.  Only original Orders can see this checkbox.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue involving which Modules you were authorized to use and the
Z-Tape function.  This has been resolved.
******************************************************************************************
Sometimes under certain conditions the posting of an Invoice would replace the
"Memo" text on an associated Serial# record with text that made it look as
though that Serial# was just added from the Invoice.  This was purely cosmetic,
and has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue on a Purchase Order if you attempted to move more than one
line-item to another Purchase Order without closing the Purchase Order in
between.
******************************************************************************************
The POS Terminal screen has had it's height changed from 600 to 680 pixels.
This makes it more compatible when viewing other documents from that screen.
******************************************************************************************
Now when duplicating an Inventory record, the Safety and Max stocking levels
are copied as well.
******************************************************************************************
The Customer "SALES QUOTAS" page has been enhanced.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.9/50.0.4.9 10/27/2011 ********************************************************

There was a problem created in the last version that made it impossible to enter
a Serial# for a "Returned" item.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
VOIDed Invoices and creditcard refunds had issues with the PayTrace processor.
This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
On the Purchase Order entry screen, the Vendor Code and Vendor Name fields now
use the standard "Vendor ChooserÓ dialogs.
******************************************************************************************
Location Codes are now sorted on the Inventory records as well as the Location
"pop-menus".  The "MAIN" is always first, followed by the sorted Location Codes.
When the "Location Chooser" dialogbox is displayed, the Location of the 
terminal it is used from is now the default.
******************************************************************************************
"Periodic Activities" now has a "plug-in tie" for custom plug-ins to run on.
******************************************************************************************
When re-printing an SRO Deposit receipt, the last four digits of the
creditcard# weren't printing.  They did print on the initial print job, however.
******************************************************************************************
GSX Modifications:
Please refer to e-mail sent to qualified Users for details...
******************************************************************************************
Some minor alterations were made to the standard "Date" choosers.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order line-item entry screen, the Serial# "Add" button has been renamed
"Select".  It can only be used for selecting a Serial# for an item being sold,
and not "Returned".  Holding down the SHIFT key still allows qualified Users
the ability to add a Serial# that doesn't exist in the system.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order line-item entry screen, a new button has been added to all a User
to enter the Serial# of a "Returned" item.
******************************************************************************************
If a GSX Part is modified at a Location by GSX, the modified data on that
Inventory record is transmitted to the MAIN.  If it differs from the MAIN, then
the MAIN Inventory record is modified.  Again, this is only for GSX products.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.8/50.0.4.8 10/22/2011 ********************************************************

** We have upgraded to 4D engine 12.3, which is now Apple Lion certified.  Your
"Client" apps will automatically be updated, when you first tie in...
******************************************************************************************
Apple had a GSX bug concerning the date format, that affected functions such as
Parts ordering.  We have attempted to compensate for this, but are unable to
test it on their "Production" servers.  It should work, however.
******************************************************************************************
If you use the "Keyword" option for Order line-item Description look-ups, then
multiple "words" are now supported.  "Words" can be separated by a single space,
"-"; ",", or ";".  The "And" conjunction (contains all) is performed, and not
"or".  The "Keyword" field on the Inventory record is also searched, but as a
single word.
******************************************************************************************
The "Delete" button for Billable Time on the SRO entry screen didn't always
work.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
When looking up a Serial Numbered piece of Equipment in GSX from an SRO, the
Description returned from GSX is no longer broken up into two lines.  It is
now entered as one line (no carriage return).
******************************************************************************************
Opening the Cash Drawer (Till), from a function other than printing, when
connected to a Receipt Printer has been modified.  As print drivers now vary
wildly, a new blank Forms Designer template called "Cash_Drawer.tmpl" is used
to trip the Cash Drawer function in the Printer.  This is a blank page where
the Print Settings and Print command have been configured to open the Cash
Drawer attached to the Receipt Printer.  This is the same configuration you
used when configuring your Invoice template to open the Cash Drawer.
******************************************************************************************
The dialogbox for a single date chooser wouldn't always modify the date
if entered from the keyboard.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
There was a misspelling in the main Record Search dialog that might have
caused erroneous search errors.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
Normally, a "Virtual Location" will not show up in most Location pop-menus.
However, there is a new checkbox on the Location entry screen called
"MAKE AVAILABLE IN POP-MENUS ANYWAY".  If this is checked, a "Virtual" Location
will show in all Location pop-menus.  This is for our special-needs Users.
******************************************************************************************
There were some issues with the "Outstanding Transfers" function.  These have
been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
On Data-Syncing SRO Deposits, if the associated Customer record is locked, the
process will continue to check until satisfied.
******************************************************************************************
There are two new Sales Reports:
	-Category Sales Report By Location
	-Product Sales Report By Location
Unlike their counterparts, they show sales information for all Locations at once.
******************************************************************************************
In the Service & Repair Module, the "Update GSX Location Defaults..." function
now requires the new "MODIFY_GSX_DEFAULTS" Password Group as opposed to it's
previous "MODIFY PREFERENCES" Group.
******************************************************************************************
If you attempt to add a Serial Number to the system directly from an Order
line-item and that Serial Number already exists, the process is aborted.  This
is part of "Special Needs" month at ExecUtron.
******************************************************************************************
The Vendor record now has a "NO LONGER ACTIVE" checkbox.  This will keep this
Vendor from most "Vendor Choosers" and keep it from being loaded to a
Purchase Order by Code or Name.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.7/50.0.4.7 09/16/2011 ********************************************************

Data-Sync Monitor window at Locations showed parcial Location listing that is
reserved for the MAIN Location to display.  This happened in the last version
update and has been fixed.  It was cosmetic only.
******************************************************************************************
On RMAs, "Virtual" Locations are now available on the Locations pop-menu.  This
way, you can have "Virtual Locations" act as a repository for defective
equipment.
******************************************************************************************
If a User belongs to the "ORDER SALES JOURNAL" Password Group, they can now
visit the Order's "Sales Journal" screen without belonging to the Accounting
Module.  You do not need to belong to this group if you already have
Accounting Module access.
******************************************************************************************
Sadly, the "Hello Kitty" splash-screen option has been removed (for obvious
reasons).  It was never meant to be there anyway (sorry Rich).  This has no
affect on ExecUtron's internal "Hello Kitty Wednesdays" however...
******************************************************************************************
Two new Splash-screens have been added, to make up for the tragic loss of the
Hello-Kitty screen.
******************************************************************************************
During the optional "Nightly Activity" process that runs after backing up, the
function that posts Invoices has been optimized for better performance.
******************************************************************************************
On the Customer entry screen, there is a new function under the "Accounting"
menu called "Export Transactions".  This will export the Customer's current
A/R Ledger Transactions.  More information is exported than what appears on the
screen.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.6/50.0.4.6 09/06/2011 ********************************************************

The Data-Sync Monitor Window is a bit taller, to accommodate a larger initial
viewing area for installations greater than 20 Locations.
******************************************************************************************
Changes were made to the way "Net Items" are processed on an Order, to match
PIMS-X v10.0.1.6.3 (for compatibility purposes).
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.5/50.0.4.5 09/04/2011 ********************************************************

Forms Designer now has drag-able guides (just like Adobe products).  Just drag
them out from the rulers.
******************************************************************************************
Anyone could change the Location Code on an SRO, regardless of whether or not
they belonged to the "CHANGE LOCATION" Password Group.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
GSX 2011/2012 BETA:
This version has the initial release of the upcoming GSX update from Apple.
All existing routines have been updated to the new GSX format.  Your current
GSX functions (for 2010/2011) have not been affected.  GSX functions such as
"Escalations" and "Communication Alerts" have not been added, as they are
better served from Apple's GSX WEB site.

Updated functions:
* "Productline" and "Configuration Code" now added to Equipment Description if
   returned by GSX (on a separate call).  This is done during the "Warranty"
   look-up.
* During the Warranty Look-up, the PIMS Serial Number file is scanned for the 
  Serial# entered.  If a match is found, the Part# is loaded to the Equipment
  line.
* A GSX Part Look-up now returns a GSX "Parts Commodity Type".
* "Mark For Auto-Complete" has been added to the Carry-In SRO upload.
* "Technician ID" and "Return Status Code" have been added to the SRO Update
  routine.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.4/50.0.4.4 08/30/2011 ********************************************************

The complete Windows PC versions of PIMS-SQL are now shipping.  This version of
PIMS-SQL is also cross-platform (either Client can connect to either Server)...
******************************************************************************************
A new Plug-In processing engine has been installed for better performance and
64-bit processing (where available).
******************************************************************************************
When displaying the larger text display box, the "E-Mail" and "Save" functions
would produce blank data.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
During Invoice posting, duplicate Serial Numbers are removed from the system.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.3/50.0.4.3 08/26/2011 ********************************************************

The Inventory "keyword" field is now searched as part of the Order line-item
"Description" search.  Previously, it just scanned the words that made up the
PRODUCT NAME.
******************************************************************************************
When sending n SRO over to an Invoice, a "Warranty" Part's quantities were not
being set to zero (even though it's converted to a "remark" line-item.  This
caused the item to show up in the "Held Items Report" even though it had no
Part#.  This was a cosmetic thing only and caused no harm, but did register in
that Report.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
General Bug Fixes...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.2.0/50.0.4.0 08/20/2011 ********************************************************

There were conditions that could cause Gift Cards to avoid being transferred to
the MAIN Location via Data-Sync.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
The method in which "Holding" is processed has been enhanced for performance.
This also clears up a few Holding issues for Receiving Records that update the
"SHIP'D" quantities on associated backordered Salesorders.  During this process,
Holding figures weren't always being updated properly on the subsequent
Inventory records.  This was a rare occurrence, but could happen.
******************************************************************************************
The new Location Datafile cloning feature ("Prep" in Locations Module) has
been enhanced and now clears Nightly Processing defaults as well as a few other
settings.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.9/50.0.3.9 08/16/2011 ********************************************************

System has been updated to 4D v12.2r3.  This yields better compatibility with
Apple's Lion O/S.
******************************************************************************************
On the Purchase Order listing, the "Dealer#" has been replaced with the
"Confirmation#".
******************************************************************************************
The "Document Storage" for both Customers and Inventory has been updated.
Documents are now kept in another file, outside of the original records.  This
gives a performance increase, especially for records with lots of Documents
attached.  You'll need to run a conversion function to update your existing
attached Documents, before you can take advantage of this...
******************************************************************************************
SROs can now store attached Documents.  This function can be found in the
"RECORDS" menu as  "Attached Documents...".
******************************************************************************************
There is a new report in the Reports menu called "Daily Revenue Export...".
This report exports sales information (from selected Invoice "Subtotals") for
a given date range for one or all Locations.  If "All" Locations is selected, a
summary grid is placed at the bottom of the export.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.8/50.0.3.8 08/07/2011 ********************************************************

During a datafile backup process while Data-Sync is running, a "non-connection"
e-mail will no longer be sent during this process.  This will only take place if
the system is not currently backing up.
******************************************************************************************
A new option on the Location record's Data-Sync section exists called
"PROCESS AUTOMATIC NIGHTLY HOLD".  When checked, Data-Sync is paused between the
hours of 10:30pm and 11:59pm.  This allows more processor time to task intensive
"Nightly Processes".  If used, your backup start time should be set for 11:00pm.
******************************************************************************************
A better alert system now exists for entering "Discontinued" items to an Order.
If your Location is out of stock on this item but other Locations have it in
stock, then you are alerted to this fact in a more detailed manner.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the SRO's "Deposits" menu called
"Refund SRO Deposit...".
******************************************************************************************
There were a few issues with "event handling" on the Order entry screen.
Totals and other figures weren't always updating unless field information
changed.  Clicking on an object or moving screen to screen would not always
register as an "update" event.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.6/50.0.3.6 08/02/2011 ********************************************************

When manually changing the "Suggested" amount on a Product Purchase Worksheet,
the "Qty" used on the subsequent Purchase Order was set to the Suggested amount
minus the number backordered.  This has been addressed.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue with Product Allocations on Purchase Orders and the
Data-Sync process.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was a situation under Client/Server where the very first line-item
printed on an Order was not printing the Serial Numbers.  This has been
addressed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.3/50.0.3.3 07/20/2011 ********************************************************

Changes/corrections have been applied to Data-Sync, related to auto-holding of
Orders that have just landed at the MAIN.
******************************************************************************************
On occasion, deleting a line-item from an Order would not update the Order
totals unless another action took place.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
Some consolidation and deletion functions have been disabled, until a future
release.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.1/50.0.3.1 07/15/2011 ********************************************************

The 4D server engine was not returning the correct number of connected Users.
We have compensated for this.
******************************************************************************************
The "Export Selected As PIMS Records..." function found in the Functions menu
of the Order listing has been fixed.  It was exporting in an older format.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.1.0/50.0.3.0 07/12/2011 ********************************************************

** This is the official first commercial release version of PIMS-SQL...
******************************************************************************************
All "Location" pop-menus now show only non-virtual Location Codes.  There are a
few exceptions, like Inventory Transfers.
******************************************************************************************
Forms Designer has a new "Functions" pop-menu.
******************************************************************************************
In Forms Designer, the "Format" for a boolean field (checkbox) to show an "X"
when check is now "X;;".
******************************************************************************************
Upon opening, the Forms Designer entry screen now expands to full-screen minus
and additional 60 pixels from the bottom.
******************************************************************************************
It is now possible to "Batch Create" a single Gift Card, where before you had to
create 2 or more...
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Export Selected As PIMS Records" has been aded to the
WiKi Listing.  This is handy if you are creating PIMS WiKis in another system,
and wish to export them for others to import and use in their system...
******************************************************************************************
There is now an optional "Category Code" on the Inventory Reconciliation
worksheet.  This allows you to isolater and count only items that belong to the
same PIMS Category.  Discrepancies are only compared to items of that Category.
This is an optional feature.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Prep" menu in the Locations Module.  A function exists there
that will allow you to take a copy of your "MAIN" datafile and prepare it for
another new Location.
******************************************************************************************
When the "E-Mail Order" dialogbox is displayed, the "TO", "CC", and "BCC"
pop-menu fields now contain not only the Order's e-mail addresses but all of the
Customer's "Additional personnel" and "Locations" e-mails (if they exist).
******************************************************************************************
When using "PayTrace" as your creditcard processor, swiping the card didn't work
on Customer Payments and SRO Deposits.  Typing it in did work.  This has been
fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 12.0.0.6/50.0.2.6 07/08/2011 ********************************************************

Data-Sync is fully functional.
******************************************************************************************
The "Keyword Search" button has been removed from the Order entry screen, as it
is now obsolete.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.2.3 (BETA) 06/29/2011 **********************************************************

When a Deposit Slip only contained "Cash" and no "Checks", it would not print.
This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where a bogus error message was displayed after printing the
Check Register.  This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
All "Print Dialog" settings can now be stored on a Forms Designer template.
This means that things like "Cutter" and "Open Cash Drawer" settings can be
stored on the template itself, which means that the Print Dialog no longer needs
to be displayed to enact these print functions.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.2.2 (BETA) 06/06/2011 **********************************************************

******************************************************************************************
There is a new checkbox on the "Custom Splash Screen" window called
"Random Daily Splash Screen".  If checked, you will get a different Splash Screen
for every day of the month...
******************************************************************************************
Data-Sync is now available for testing.  We already know of a few issues, but it
seems to work.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new menu function in the Location Module (Data-Sync menu) called
"Grab Data-Sync Screen-Shot".  When selected (from a Client app), a screen-shot
of the server's Data-Sync Monitor window will be displayed.  This image can be
up to 10 seconds old, as it is updated every 10 seconds on the server.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a Location listing with last connection info on the Data-Sync
Monitor window ("MAIN" only).  This shows the last connection info for each
Location in the system.  There is also a new option on the "MAIN" Location
record to alert you by e-mail if a Location that was connecting hasn't connected
for 20 minutes or more.  When an e-mail is sent, a screen-shot of the Monitor
window is attached.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.2.1 (BETA) 05/28/2011 **********************************************************

The General Journal entry screen now has Import/Export buttons to export the
line-items (transactions) as text.  As long as the structure of the export is
not altered, it can be imported back on to another General Journal screen.  This
is handy if you are needing to leave this screen and come back to finish a long
entry later.  It is also good for "prototyping" a booking to see the "What If"
of it before posting.  This is often done in a resent copy of your datafile...
******************************************************************************************
A listing Search Control has been aded to the General Ledger listing.
******************************************************************************************
You can now add a Chart-Of-Account (General Ledger) record from the General
Journal entry screen.
******************************************************************************************
A new "External Reference#" field has been added to the General Ledger entry
screen.  This optional field exists just incase you need to match your
accounts with an external system (your CPA's?).  This Reference has also been
added to the General Ledger listing (in green), right below the Account#. This
is also included in the "Export" button found on the Trial Balance screen.
When entering Accounts onto a General Journal screen, you can use this Ref# in
the Account Code field to enter that COA as well.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function for the "Nightly Processes" that will record the ending
Inventory figures for Inventory records in a special table.  This information
constitues the ending "ON-HANDs, HOLDING, etc. totals for a given product per
Location per month.  To list these figures, choose "Month-End Inventory..." from
the main "Reports" menu.  These figures always represent that day's starting
figures for your Inventory.
******************************************************************************************
Many new "Splash-Screen" options have been added.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.2.0 (BETA) 05/17/2011 **********************************************************

There is now a BETA of the Client/Server version of PIMS-SQL (Mac only)...
******************************************************************************************
"Realtime Holding" has been removed from the system.  "Holding" when saving an
Order record is vastly superior and should be used instead.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Admin Process Window..." has been added to the "Reports"
menu.
******************************************************************************************
When using the new "E-Mail As PDF Attachment..." function from an Order, there
is a new addition to the process.  If you have a Forms Designer template that
is named exactly the same as the Order template being used, except that it ends
in "-PDF" instead, it will be used as the attached PDF Order.  For example, if
your default Invoice template is called "Invoice.tmpl" and you also have one
named "Invoice-PDF.tmpl", the "Invoice-PDF.tmpl" will be used instead.  Again,
this only works from the "E-Mail As PDF Attachment..." menu.
******************************************************************************************
There was a problem with "PERIODIC ACTIVITIES" where it would run non-stop.
This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "Holding" mechanism that virtually eliminates record-lock
situations during product holding.  It's a background process that makes sure
that holding is maintained accurately throughout the day.  We still have some
error-trapping to do, but it works great!
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 50.0.1.8 (BETA) 05/10/2011 **********************************************************

The Order "Type" pop-menu selector has also been added to the Order Line-Items
page.
******************************************************************************************
The Order's "PAID" field is now back on the Order entry screen, right next to
the PAID checkbox.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO entry screen and listings are now 1100 pixels wide (100 more than other
PIMS screens).  This is to accommodate the embedded WEB pages...
******************************************************************************************
PIMS-SQL has been updated to reflect the enhancements added to PIMS-X v10.1.6.0.
This includes the new "Deposits" features and GSX Parts Update features.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a full-blown GSX WEB browser built into the SRO entry screen.  It
uses new defaults to display the GSX Log-On page, and then allows you to conduct
GSX WEB activities directly on the SRO screen.  There's also macro buttons that
will insert PIMS SRO record info into selected WEB fields for you.  Just click
in a WEB field and then click the button representing the information you would
like pasted into that field.  Before this new function is available, you must
go to the GSX Preferences screen for that Location and enter a few pieces of
information.  This includes selecting the appropriate GSX URL (usually https:
//gsx.apple.com).
******************************************************************************************
There is a new "PIMS WiKi" Module and functions in PIMS-SQL.  This allows
someone who belongs to the "WiKi_MODULE" Password Group to create "WiKis" for
Users to access throughout PIMS.  WiKis can have a "Question", "Answer", and
"Subject" along with optional attached Picture, Document, and WEB URL link.
WiKis are available to Users via an "Eye Glasses" ICON, found on various screens
and menus.  You can add as many Wikis to your system as you like. ExecUtron also
has some WiKis that you can import, that explain various functions and reports
within PIMS-SQL.  When you first launch your system, and there are no WiKi
records, PIMS will add a few for you to get started.  WiKi's are a great place
to add special directions for your Users, printer configurations, and even a 
great place to store and distribute any custom Plug-Ins you might have.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new function under the Order's and SRO's "Records" menu called
"Log Contact Record...".  This will allow you to log a "Contact" record for the
associated Customer (just like on the Customer record).  The keyboard shortcut
is "Command-K".  From the Order, the Order must be saved or the new Contact will
not be saved.  On the SRO, the Contact record is always saved.
******************************************************************************************
On the Order entry screen, the BNAME, SNAME, and BATTN fields now do multiple
keyword look-ups.
******************************************************************************************
The Location Codes shown on the main Splash-Screens have been changed from 18
point font to 24 point font (for our blind Indiana Users).
******************************************************************************************
The Location GSX Preferences now has a default "PART RETURN WINDOW" field.  If
left at zero, it defaults to the original 13 days.
******************************************************************************************
There was an issue where attached Order documents were showing up on all Orders.
This has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
The listing pointers on Purchase Order and Order listings caused the wrong
record to be displayed when double-clicked.  This has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The SRO listing has been cleaned-up a bit...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 50.0.1.5 (BETA) 04/30/2011 **********************************************************

There is a new function under the Order screen's "eBusiness" menu called 
"E-Mail As PDF Attachment...".  This will act just like the "E-Mail Order"
function, except that it will automatically print a PDF version of the Order to
the DeskTop (no dialog windows), and attach it to your e-mail instead of the 
HTML version.  Once sent, the PDF is deleted from the DeskTop.
******************************************************************************************
The printing of Orders has been activated for all BETA testers.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.1.4 (BETA) 04/30/2011 **********************************************************

The "BETA" version now shows on Splash screens (ie: 50.0.1.3) and not the
production version (ie: 12.0.0.0).
******************************************************************************************
An error when listing records and clicking "Done" has been corrected.
******************************************************************************************
The newly updated "12 Month Sales Graph" function now defaults the starting
date to the start of your Fiscal year.  If the period you choose for this
report matches your Fiscal (regardless of year), then the legion shows the
words "Fiscal" instead of "Starting..." and "YearBefore".
******************************************************************************************
The record "Search" control object has been added to the top of the Order
listing.  It searches "BNAME", "SNAME", "BATTN", and "SATTN" fields for a 
match.
******************************************************************************************
The "Move To Another P.O." function in purchasing has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
The Order Document storage feature has been further enhanced.  Double-clicking
on a line will now export (dump) that document.  The Date, Time, and Terminal of
the last "Dump" is also recorded.
******************************************************************************************
There is now Document Storage (similar to Orders) on the Purchase Order.
******************************************************************************************
You are now prompted to save the Purchase Order record when printing it.  You
can decline if desired.
******************************************************************************************
When the BETA expires, the "Check For Updates" function runs properly now for
this version of PIMS (from this point on).
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.1.2 (BETA) 04/28/2011 **********************************************************

Switched to 4D Compiler v12.2...
******************************************************************************************
The Search Field Control at the top of record listings can now accept multiple
words, separated by spaces.
******************************************************************************************
There is now a "Date Selector" control next to the Order "Date" field.
******************************************************************************************
Clicking on the Order# on the Order entry screen will now place the Order# on
the Clipboard/Pasteboard.
******************************************************************************************
The "TOTAL SALES GRAPH" function under the "Reports" menu has been renamed
"12 Month Sales Graph".  It has been altered to prompt for a starting month.
The graph and associated figures are then based on a 12 month period starting
with that month.  "Last Year" is now represented as the same range from a year
prior.  This is great for Users on a "non-calendar" fiscal year...
******************************************************************************************
The Order records can now have an unlimited number of attached documents.
Each document can be up to 20MB in size, and will not affect performance.
There is a conversion function to translate existing documents over to this
format.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.1.1 (BETA) 04/24/2011 **********************************************************

Switched to 4D Compiler v12.1 build 5 (many 4D bug fixes)
******************************************************************************************
Receiving Record has "Page Navigation TAB" back...
******************************************************************************************
An "All Records" button has been added to the new Search Editor.
******************************************************************************************
The Import/Export Module has had all "PIMS Records" functions updated to a 
newer format.
******************************************************************************************
The "Backordered Salesorder" function has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
Inventory record duplication has been updated.
******************************************************************************************
The "Receiving" menu's "Find By Serial#..." function has had a performance
increase of several thousand percent...
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************



**** 50.0.0.8 (BETA) 04/12/2011 **********************************************************

The Forms Designer Module has been completely rewritten, and is more compatible
with today's printing solutions.
******************************************************************************************
An error with posting/unposting Receiving Records has been fixed.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************


**** 50.0.0.5 (BETA) 04/01/2011 **********************************************************

This is a completely new PIMS system, based on 4D SQL v12.
This is the initial BETA version...
******************************************************************************************
All "Product Name" fields have been increased from 80 characters to 200.
******************************************************************************************
The following functions have been removed from the main "File" menu, and are now
accessed from a new "PIMS-X Tools..." menu:

	Master Applicator
	Change Passwording
	Restart PIMS
	Current Backup Stats
	Current Server Information
	4D Preferences
	
There are also new functions related to Maintenance ("4D Tools", etc.) that can
be found here as well.  A new Password Group called "PIMS_Tools" now exists,
and only those assigned to it can access PIMS Tools.
******************************************************************************************
The "Records With Components..." menu item under the "Inventory" menu now has
sub-menus for the various types of Inventory records that might have Components
present.
******************************************************************************************
Certain record listings now have a standard "List Search" field in the upper
left-hand corner.  It will usually perform a Keyword search on the "Name" field.
******************************************************************************************
On a record listing, you no longer need to select a record first before selecting
"Select All" from the "Edit" menu.
******************************************************************************************
The way in which Components are added to an Inventory record has changed
slightly.
******************************************************************************************
A new style of synthetic ExecULock system is in place.  Previous "ExecULocks"
are no longer valid with this version.
******************************************************************************************
A window is now displayed when running on a Daily Pass (lower right-hand corner).
******************************************************************************************
"ExecULock" technology has been updated...
******************************************************************************************
From the "Log-In" screen, you can now expand the height of the window, sort
Users, and search for a User in the list.
******************************************************************************************
When running PIMS for the first time after an update, a "New Version" sticker
is displayed on the main splash-screen.  Clicking this sticker will download
and display the current Version History document which details the changes to
the program.  This sticker is only displayed once per update.
******************************************************************************************
The "Graphing" function has been removed from the main "Inventory" menu.
******************************************************************************************
A new function called "Simple Labels..." has been added to the Inventory Listing
"Function" menu.
******************************************************************************************
All "Search Editors" have been changed from the standard "4D" version to the new
improved "EDC" version, complete with field search etc.
******************************************************************************************
The "Date Selectors" have been modified.
******************************************************************************************
There is a new option in PIMS Preferences called "This Is A Remote Internet
Terminal" (front page at bottom).  This option exists for those who use a PIMS
Client to connect over the Internet to the PIMS-SQL Server.  If checked, it will
modify the Client for better performance over the Internet.  This is done by
disabling certain internal functions, causing specific reports to be performed
on the server and then transferred to the Client when finished, etc.  This
function is terminal specific.
******************************************************************************************
The "Custom Splash Screen" option in PIMS Preferences has been moved to its own
menu.  You now have the capability to choose from various "Themes", including
a "Custom" picture and a Splash Screen with a default WEB page.  This setting is
also terminal specific.
******************************************************************************************
If you have "Perform Keyword Search On 'NAME' Fields" checked in PIMS
Preferences, a new high-speed SQL "Keyword" search will now be performed on the
following entry fields:
	Order "Bill-To" Name
	Order "Ship-To" Name
	Order "Bill-To" Attn
	SRO "Bill-To: Name
	SRO "Bill-To: Attn
This is a magnitude faster than PIMS-X...
******************************************************************************************
If "Perform Keyword Search On Order Description" is checked in PIMS Preferences,
a new high-speed SQL "Keyword" search will be performed on the Order's
Line-Item "Description" field with the text entered.
******************************************************************************************
******************************************************************************************